Panasonic KX-TDA100 Pc Programming Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Panasonic Manuals
  4. PBX
  5. HYBRID IP-PBX KX-TDA100
  6. Pc programming manual

Panasonic KX-TDA100 Pc Programming Manual

Hybrid ip-pbx
Hide thumbs Also See for KX-TDA100:
1
2
3
4
Table Of Contents
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

See also: Pc Programming Manual , Feature Manual
Hybrid IP-PBX
PC Programming Manual
KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100
Model No.
KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600
Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX.
Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use.
KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later
KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later
KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading

Related Manuals for Panasonic KX-TDA100

Summary of Contents for Panasonic KX-TDA100

  • Page 1 Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this manual for future use. KX-TDA30: PSMPR Software File Version 4.0000 or later KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later KX-TDA600: PLMPR Software File Version 5.0000 or later...
  • Page 2 About this Programming Manual The PC Programming Manual is designed to serve as a system programming reference for the Panasonic Hybrid IP-PBX. It explains how to programme this PBX using the Maintenance Console software. The PC Programming Manual is divided into the following sections: Section 1, Overview Provides an overview of programming the PBX.
  • Page 3 Some optional service cards, PTs, and features are not available in some areas. Additionally, some optional service cards and features are not available for some PBX models. Please consult your certified Panasonic dealer for more information. • Product specifications, including text displayed by the software, are subject to change without notice.
  • Page 4 Radio & Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) Directive 1999/5/EC. Declarations of Conformity for the relevant Panasonic products described in this manual are available for download by visiting: http://www.doc.panasonic.de...

  • Page 5: Table Of Contents

    Table of Contents Overview ....................11 Introduction........................12 1.1.1 Introduction........................12 1.1.2 Entering Characters......................13 PC Programming ......................17 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console ............17 1.2.2 Password Security ......................21 Maintenance Console Operating Instructions ........23 Introduction........................24 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes ............
  • Page 6 Utility—Error Log......................80 2.6.9 Utility—T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30)................82 2.6.10 Utility—T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30) ........................83 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace ..................84 2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report ..................85 2.6.13...
  • Page 7 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) ..281 2.8.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only)......................... 288 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type................289 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port ................294 2.8.32...
  • Page 8 2.10.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign .................480 2.10.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate ................481 2.10.7 [3-2] User Group ......................482 2.10.8 [3-3] Call Pickup Group ....................483 2.10.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting ................484 2.10.10 [3-4] Paging Group ......................485 2.10.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting ..................487 2.10.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager................488 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings ..........490 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List..........
  • Page 9 [11] Maintenance ......................784 2.18.1 [11-1] Main........................784 2.18.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access..................802 2.18.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)....803 Appendix....................805 Revision History ......................806 3.1.1 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 3.1xxx............806 3.1.2 KX-TDA600 PLMPR Software File Version 5.0xxx............808 3.1.3...
  • Page 10 PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 11: Overview

    Section 1 Overview This section provides an overview of programming the PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 12: Introduction

    1.1 Introduction Introduction 1.1.1 Introduction These programming instructions are designed to serve as an overall system programming reference for the PBX. Each feature in the PBX has default settings that can be changed to customise the PBX to your requirements. These settings control the functions of the PBX, and changing them is referred to as "system programming".

  • Page 13: Entering Characters

    1.1 Introduction 1.1.2 Entering Characters The characters on a white background below can be used when storing a name, message, password or other text entry data using a PC. The available characters vary according to the model of PBX. Table 1 (Standard) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 14 1.1 Introduction Table 2 (For CE model) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 15 1.1 Introduction Table 3 (For RU model) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 16 1.1 Introduction Table 4 (For GR model) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 17: Pc Programming

    1.2 PC Programming PC Programming 1.2.1 Installing and Starting the Maintenance Console System programming, diagnosis and administration can be performed with a PC using the Maintenance Console. This section briefly describes how to install and start the Maintenance Console when the PC and the PBX are connected by USB cable.

  • Page 18: Installing The Maintenance Console

    1.2 PC Programming Installing the Maintenance Console Notes • To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows XP Professional, you must be logged in as a user in either the "Administrators" or "Power Users" group. • To install or uninstall the software on a PC running Windows Vista Business, you must be logged in as a user in the "Administrators"...
  • Page 19 Replacement may take several minutes to complete. Follow the procedure described in Section 2.16.1 Starting the PBX (for KX-TDA600), Section 2.13.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200) or 2.12.1 Starting the Hybrid IP-PBX (for KX- TDA30) in the Installation Manual and restart the PBX.
  • Page 20 1.2 PC Programming The system menu appears. You may now begin programming the PBX. Notice During a long programming session, it is highly recommended that you periodically save the system data to the SD Memory Card. If the PBX undergoes a sudden power failure or if the system is reset for some reason, all the system data in RAM will be lost.

  • Page 21: Password Security

    1.2 PC Programming 1.2.2 Password Security To maintain system security, system passwords are required to access certain programming functions of the PBX. By giving different users access to different passwords, it is possible to control the amount of programming that each user is able to perform. The following types of system passwords are available: Password Description...
  • Page 22 1.2 PC Programming PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 23: Maintenance Console Operating Instructions

    Section 2 Maintenance Console Operating Instructions This section serves as reference operating instructions when using the Maintenance Console software to programme the PBX. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 24: Introduction

    2.1 Introduction Introduction 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes Every time Maintenance Console is started, a dialogue box will appear. From here, you can enter any of the 2 available software modes. • Batch mode Batch mode allows you to create new system data files, and make modifications to system data files stored on your PC, without being connected to the PBX.
  • Page 25 Specify the IP address of the PBX on the LAN. 223.255.255.255 Enter the same IP address that was input in IP Address of 2.8.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only). Port Number 1–65535 Specify the port number used to access the PBX via LAN.
  • Page 26 2.1 Introduction Connection Setting for ISDN Remote Setting Values Explanation Dial Number 30 digits (consisting of Enter the telephone number to be dialled to 1-9, 0, *, #, -, and "," access the PBX. [comma]) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 27: Access Levels

    2.1 Introduction 2.1.2 Access Levels There are three main levels of access to the Maintenance Console: User, Administrator and Installer. Each level has its own Programmer Code, which must be entered to run the Maintenance Console. The allowed format for each programmer code is as follows: Item Length User Level Programmer Code...
  • Page 28 2.1 Introduction Start Menu Menu Option Batch Interactive Connect—Profile Setup File Menu Option Batch Interactive Close Save Save As Exit Disconnect Menu Option Batch Interactive Disconnect Tool Menu Option Batch Interactive SD memory backup BRI Automatic Configuration NDSS Link Data Clear DXDP All OUS Simplified Voice Message→Delete All Recording...
  • Page 29 2.1 Introduction Tool Menu Option Batch Interactive Import→ARS - Except Code Import→ARS - Routing Plan Import→Wired Extension Import→PS Extension Import→Quick Dial (Basic) Import→Quick Dial (MEC) Export→Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID Export→Incoming Call - DDI/DID Table Export→ARS - Leading Digit Export→ARS - Except Code Export→ARS - Routing Plan Export→Wired Extension...
  • Page 30 Utility Menu Option Batch Interactive Message File Transfer PBX to PC Error Log T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX-TDA30) T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600) E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30) ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace...
  • Page 31 2.1 Introduction Help Menu Option Batch Interactive Help Additional Information About PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 32: Software Interface

    2.1 Introduction 2.1.3 Software Interface This section explains the functions of the various elements of the software interface. Main Window The window of the Maintenance Console software is divided into several areas, as shown below: 1. Menu Bar Provides access to file management and connection options, as well as tools and utilities used in programming the PBX.
  • Page 33 2.1 Introduction 2. Tool Bar Provides easy access to commonly used software functions. Two tool bars are provided, as follows: • File Contains the icon for saving files. For details, see Section 2.3.2 File—Save. • Tools Contains icons for backing up PBX data to the SD Memory Card, viewing extension information, and accessing Online Help.
  • Page 34 2.1 Introduction Area Values Description Access Level Level : Displays the current access level, User determined by the Programmer Code Administrator entered when starting Maintenance Installer Console. See 2.1.2 Access Levels for more information. PBX System Data Versionxxx-xxx Displays the version number of the Version system software installed to the PBX.

  • Page 35: Card Status

    2.1 Introduction 2.1.4 Card Status Certain tools, utilities and settings require that the target card be set to out-of-service (OUS) or in- service (INS) status before the operation is carried out. Where required, this is noted in the description of each item. Card status changes can only be performed when the software is in Interactive mode (see 2.1.1 Starting Maintenance Console and Software Modes).

  • Page 36: Display Options

    2.1 Introduction 2.1.5 Display Options The View and Window menus provide options to control the display of items within the Maintenance Console. • View – Toolbar: Displays or hides the tool bar of commonly used buttons. – Statusbar: Displays or hides the bar at the bottom of the Maintenance Console window. –...

  • Page 37: Extension Number Setting

    2.1 Introduction 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting Many screens within the Maintenance Console software allow you to select extensions as part of programming various features (for example, as members of a group). These screens use a standard window to make selecting multiple extensions easy, accessed by clicking a button. This section explains how to use this Extension Number Setting window.

  • Page 38: Start Menu

    Use only when necessary. To create a new system data file From the start menu, select New. Click the appropriate model number. Select whether an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed or not. Click OK. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 39: Start Menu-Open

    2.2 Start Menu 2.2.2 Start Menu—Open Opens a system data file previously saved on the PC, and enters Batch mode. When opening a file created with an older version of the Maintenance Console, you will be asked whether you want to convert the data for use with the current version or not. Using the data without converting may result in some data being loaded to an incorrect destination, and is not recommended.

  • Page 40: Start Menu-Connect-Rs-232C

    2.2 Start Menu 2.2.3 Start Menu—Connect—RS-232C Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the serial RS-232C interface of the PBX. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary. If you connect to multiple PBXs and would prefer to choose from among pre-saved profiles instead, see 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup for more details about creating profiles.

  • Page 41: Start Menu-Connect-Usb

    2.2 Start Menu 2.2.4 Start Menu—Connect—USB Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the USB port on the PBX, or a USB port (USB Module) attached to a DPT. To connect to the PBX by USB From the start menu, select Connect. The Login window will be displayed.

  • Page 42: Start Menu-Connect-Lan

    Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the Local Area Network interface of the PBX. A CTI-LINK card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or IP-GW4 card (KX-TDA30) must be installed and the IP address of the PBX set to use this feature. For more details, see 2.8.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) and 2.8.33 [1-1]...

  • Page 43: Start Menu-Connect-Modem

    2.2 Start Menu 2.2.6 Start Menu—Connect—Modem Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode through the modem. To access the PBX remotely using this feature, an RMT card must be installed and the Remote— Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number assigned in 2.18.1 [11-1] Main. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

  • Page 44: Start Menu-Connect-Isdn Remote

    2.2 Start Menu 2.2.7 Start Menu—Connect—ISDN Remote Connects to the PBX in Interactive mode using the ISDN TA interface of the PBX. This method is only available when a user-supplied ISDN TA that supports CAPI 2.0 is used, and Remote—ISDN Remote Floating Extension Number of the 2.18.1 [11-1] Main screen is set. This option allows direct entry of connection parameters, for cases where the PC is used to connect to one or just a few PBXs, and an individual profile for each PBX is not necessary.

  • Page 45: Start Menu-Connect-Profile Setup

    2.2 Start Menu 2.2.8 Start Menu—Connect—Profile Setup Profiles are useful when one PC is used to connect to multiple PBXs. Rather than manually adjusting the connection settings each time a different PBX is accessed, it is possible to store the connection settings for several PBXs.

  • Page 46: File

    2.3 File File 2.3.1 File—Close Closes the system data file that is currently being modified, and returns to the start menu. To close a system data file • From the File menu, select Close. If the system data file has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file.

  • Page 47: File-Save

    2.3 File 2.3.2 File—Save Overwrites the previously saved system data file with the system data currently being modified in Batch mode. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card). To save a system data file •...

  • Page 48: File-Save As

    2.3 File 2.3.3 File—Save As Saves the system data file being modified in Batch mode with the name chosen by the user. To upload a file saved here to the SD memory card installed in the PBX, see 2.6.2 Utility—File Transfer PC to PBX (SD Card).

  • Page 49: File-Exit

    2.3 File 2.3.4 File—Exit Closes the Maintenance Console. To exit the Maintenance Console • From the File menu, select Exit. If the system data file being modified has not been saved, a warning message will be displayed, giving you the option to save the file. •...

  • Page 50: Disconnect

    2.4 Disconnect Disconnect 2.4.1 Disconnect—Disconnect Closes the connection between the Maintenance Console and the PBX. When this option is chosen, system data is automatically backed up from the PBX to the SD memory card (see 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup). To disconnect From the Disconnect menu, select Disconnect.

  • Page 51: Tool

    2.5 Tool Tool 2.5.1 Tool—SD memory backup Saves system data from the PBX to the SD memory card. Backup begins as soon as this option is chosen. To back up system data • From the Tool menu, select SD memory backup. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 52: Tool-Bri Automatic Configuration

    2.5 Tool 2.5.2 Tool—BRI Automatic Configuration Automatically configures the network settings of the BRI card. This option is only available at Installer level. This tool automatically inputs values into the fields L1 Mode, L2 Mode, Access Mode, and TEI Mode, on the Network tab of the 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port screen. Notes •...

  • Page 53: Tool-Ndss Link Data Clear

    2.5 Tool 2.5.3 Tool—NDSS Link Data Clear Clears NDSS Link Data stored in the connected PBX. While this tool clears both monitor extension and monitored extension data, it only clears it at the connected PBX. To clear this data at other PBXs in the network, it is necessary to run this tool at those PBXs.

  • Page 54: Tool-Dxdp All Ous

    2.5 Tool 2.5.4 Tool—DXDP All OUS Sets the status of all DXDP/XDP extension ports to "OUS" simultaneously. To set all DXDP/XDP ports to OUS. From the Tool menu, select DXDP All OUS. Click OK. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 55: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Delete All Recording

    2.5 Tool 2.5.5 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Delete All Recording Deletes all voice messages recorded to SVM/ESVM cards installed in the PBX. To delete voice messages From the Tool menu, point to Simplified Voice Message and select Delete All Recording. Select the card from which to delete messages. Click OK.

  • Page 56: Tool-Simplified Voice Message-Check Current Usage

    2.5 Tool 2.5.6 Tool—Simplified Voice Message—Check Current Usage Displays information on the voice messages stored in SVM/ESVM cards installed in the PBX. For each message, the type of message and the associated extension are displayed. To view SVM message status •...

  • Page 57: Tool-Extension List View

    2.5 Tool 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View Displays a list of all programmed extension numbers and types. The types that can be displayed are as follows: Type Detail Intercom Wired Extension Voice Mail Portable Station Wireless Extension (Portable Station) ICDG Incoming Call Distribution Group PS Ring Group VM (DPT) VM (DPT) Group...

  • Page 58: Tool-Import

    2.5 Tool 2.5.8 Tool—Import Allows several types of system data files or tables to be imported. Except for Speed Dial and Caller ID, this option is only available at Installer level. The files from which data can be imported are files that were previously saved at this or another PBX using the Export tool (see 2.5.9 Tool—Export), or comma-separated value (CSV) files.
  • Page 59 2.5 Tool ARS - Leading Digit Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Leading Digit Additional Number of Digits Additional Dial Digits Routing Plan Number Route Plan Number Related programming: 2.15.2 [8-2] Leading Number ARS - Except Code Data Type Import Destination Location Leading Number Exception Exception Code...
  • Page 60 If applicable, a list of field names found in the imported file will be displayed. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX- TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table to which to import the data (KX-TDA30: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600: system or tenant) from the drop-down list.
  • Page 61 2.5 Tool If data in a field being imported does not match the required format for the import destination, an error message will be displayed when the import operation is attempted, and the operation will be cancelled. This can occur when, for example, the destination field can only accept numeric data, but the data being imported contains alphabet characters, as the correct fields were not linked together.

  • Page 62: Tool-Export

    When export fields can be selected, the selection screen will be displayed automatically. For the Feature - Speed Dial and Caller ID table, when an EMEC (KX-TDA600) or MEC (KX- TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) card is installed, select the Speed Dial table from which to export the data (KX-TDA30: Basic Memory or Expanded Memory; KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600: system or tenant) from the drop-down list.

  • Page 63: Tool-Screen Customize-User Level/Administrator Level

    2.5 Tool 2.5.10 Tool—Screen Customize—User Level/Administrator Level Allows you to specify which menu screens, tools and utilities can be accessed in User and Administrator levels. This option is only available at Installer level. Selected check boxes will be displayed on the main screen of the Maintenance Console and in the menu bar to users with the level of access being edited.

  • Page 64: Utility

    Performs diagnostic tests on cards installed in the PBX, to identify the source of problems. There are 2 types of test, Card Test and Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only). If any of the tests listed here returns the result "NG" ("No Good"), contact your dealer. Test results can be saved as a TXT-format (text) file.
  • Page 65 2.6 Utility KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 Local loop back diagnosis Card CT Bus diagnosis (KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) DTMF Receive test port PT loop back diagnosis Caller ID Card DTMF Sending Out Diagnosis DSP DTMF generator/receiver diagnosis DSP DTMF receiver diagnosis Framer IC alarm signal...
  • Page 66 Click Save. • Click Cancel to return to the Diagnosis screen. Pair Port Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Tests the combination of an extension port and trunk port to ensure that communication with the trunk port can be carried out successfully. PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 67 Notes • To perform this test, it is necessary to set Loopback Test started by Network in 2.8.16 [1- 1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) to "Enable". • The version of the PRI23 card must be 2.000 or later.
  • Page 68 2.6 Utility To perform a network loopback test From the Utility menu, select Diagnosis. Click on the Status cell of the PRI23 card, and set it to "OUS". Click on the cell showing the card type. A new window will be displayed. Select the Loopback Type option.

  • Page 69: Utility-File Transfer Pc To Pbx (Sd Card)

    Corresponding Card PSMPR PSMPR_S MPR* *: PSMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PSMPR_S". KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PMPR PMPR_SUB MPR* *: PMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PMPR_SUB".
  • Page 70 *: PLMPR-file-format data that is transferred to the PBX from the PC is saved as "PLMPR_S". LPR Program KX-TDA30 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PSVOIPEX IP-EXT4 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card PCSINF CSIF PDHLC DHLC8/DLC8/DLC16 PSLC...
  • Page 71 CS using a DHLC/DLC card for DECT Portable Station PHCSDECT High-density CS for DECT Portable Station PCS24G CS using a CSIF card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PDCS24G CS using a DHLC/DLC card for 2.4 GHz Portable Station System Data KX-TDA30...
  • Page 72 DSISLCLC SLC4/SLC8 DSIDLC DLC4/DLC8 DSIBRI BRI1/BRI2 DSILCOT LCOT2/LCOT4 DSIEIO DPH2/DPH4 DSIIPGW IP-GW4 DSIDID DID3 DSIE1 DSIIPEXT IP-EXT4 KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DINI DIDHLC DHLC8 DISLC SLC8/CSLC16 DIDLC DLC8/DLC16 DIBRI DICSINF CSIF DILCOT LCOT8/LCOT16 DIT1 DIE1 DIEM E&M...
  • Page 73 2.6 Utility KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DIIPGW1 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0480) DIIPGW2 IP-GW4 (KX-TDA0484) DIIPGW3 IP-GW16 DIPRI23 PRI23 DIPRI30 PRI30 DISLCLC SLC16 DIDID DID8 DIIPEXT IP-EXT16 KX-TDA600 Name on SD Memory Card Corresponding Card DLINI EMPR DLIDHLC DHLC8...
  • Page 74 2.6 Utility Select the file to upload. A window showing the upload progress will be displayed. While transferring files to the SD memory card, the PBX automatically renames them according to the header information. A message will be displayed when the transfer is complete. Click OK.

  • Page 75: Utility-File Transfer Pbx (Sd Card) To Pc

    This option is only available at Installer level. The files that can be downloaded from the SD memory card are as follows: File Name File Type DSSYS (KX-TDA30) System Data DSYS (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) DLSYS (KX-TDA600) $SYSERR Error Data $SYSERR1–$SYSERR9 DSKEYSD (KX-TDA30)

  • Page 76: Utility-Sd Card File View And Load

    2.6 Utility 2.6.4 Utility—SD Card File View and Load Displays a list of files on the SD memory card, and allows you to update the programs stored in LPR cards (cards with local processors) and Cell Stations (CSs). This option is only available at Installer level. To update the program stored in an LPR card, the card must first be set to out of service (OUS).

  • Page 77: Utility-Sd Card File Delete

    This option is only available at Installer level. The following essential system files cannot be deleted by this utility: KX-TDA30: PSMPR, DSSYS, DSKEYSD KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: PMPR, DSYS, DKEYSD KX-TDA600: PLMPR, DLSYS, DLKEYSD To delete files from the SD memory card From the Utility menu, select SD Card File Delete.

  • Page 78: Utility-Message File Transfer Pc To Pbx

    This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. For the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status. For the KX-TDA30, the MSG card must be set to OUS status.

  • Page 79: Utility-Message File Transfer Pbx To Pc

    This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that at least 1 MSG/ESVM card is installed. For the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, the OPB card that it is mounted on must be set to OUS status. For the KX-TDA30, the MSG card must be set to OUS status.

  • Page 80: Utility-Error Log

    2.6 Utility 2.6.8 Utility—Error Log Collects and displays system error information. Whenever there is a system failure, the PBX stores the error code generated. The connected PC collects all of these codes, along with other information, and displays an explanatory error message. The functions of the buttons on this screen are as follows: Button Function...
  • Page 81 04: Free slot type A, 05 to 07: Free slot type B, 08 to 11: Option slot) KX-TDA100: 00 to 06 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 06: Free slot) KX-TDA200: 00 to 11 (00: MPR slot; 01 to 11: Free slot) KX-TDA600: •...

  • Page 82: Utility-T1/E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (For Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (For Kx-Tda30)

    TDA200/KX-TDA600) / E1 Signalling Bit Monitor (for KX- TDA30) Displays reference signalling bit information for all channels of the T1 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) or E1 card, by monitoring sent and received A, B, C and D bits. This utility is intended for use by dealers.

  • Page 83: Utility-T1/E1 Line Trace (For Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600) / E1 Line Trace (For Kx-Tda30)

    This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target card be set to INS status. To view trace data From the Utility menu, select T1/E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or E1 Line Trace (for KX-TDA30). From the Slot No drop-down list, select the target slot.

  • Page 84: Utility-Isdn/Qsig Protocol Trace

    2.6 Utility 2.6.11 Utility—ISDN/QSIG Protocol Trace This utility collects protocol trace data from BRI, PRI or IP-GW cards, and displays it on the PC. This option is only available at Installer level, and requires that the target BRI, PRI or IP-GW card be set to INS status.

  • Page 85: Utility-Digital Trunk Error Report

    2.6 Utility 2.6.12 Utility—Digital Trunk Error Report Displays accumulated information on various types of errors occurring on digital trunks. This option is only available at Installer level. The value displayed for each error item is the number of times that each error occurred during the time period selected.

  • Page 86: Utility-Ip Extension Statistical Information

    2.6 Utility 2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information Displays accumulated statistical information on both IP extensions and IP-EXT cards. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description Collection Started Time Date and time the port was last reset. Port No. Number of the port. RTP Receive Packet Counter Total number of packets received.

  • Page 87: Utility-Cs Information

    When an extension number is not registered, the display shows "OFF". 2.4 GHz PSs can use up to 3 paths (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30). DECT PSs can use up to 4 paths (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 2 paths (KX-TDA30).
  • Page 88 2.6 Utility Click Save. • Click Cancel to return to the main screen. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 89: Utility-Ps Information

    2.6 Utility 2.6.15 Utility—PS Information Displays Portable Station (PS) registration information, including the associated Cell Station (CS). This option is only available at Installer level. The displayed items are as follows: Item Description PS No. PS location number. Only registered PSs will be displayed. Extension Number Extension number of the PS.

  • Page 90: Utility-Timed Update

    2.6 Utility 2.6.16 Utility—Timed Update Updates programs in the LPR cards (optional service cards with local processors) by comparing them with files found on the SD memory card on a preset schedule, and downloading newer files to the cards. This option is only available at Installer level. It is recommended to set the timed update to take place during the least active time period, for example late at night.
  • Page 91 2.6 Utility Select the Off (Cancel) option. Click Apply. A message box will be displayed. Click Yes. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 92: Utility-System Reset-Reset By The Command

    Backup main system data file PSMPR PBX program file. Contains the software to run the MPR board of the PBX. PSMPR_S Backup PBX program file KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 File Name Description DSYS Main system data file. Contains all of the current configuration data for the PBX.
  • Page 93 2.6 Utility • On earlier versions, the reset request confirmation screen will be displayed, and files will not be updated. To update system files and reset the PBX From the Utility menu, point to System Reset and then click Reset by the Command. Choose whether to back up current system data or not.

  • Page 94: Utility-Flash Rom Id Information

    2.6 Utility 2.6.18 Utility—Flash ROM ID Information Displays the Flash ROM ID number pre-assigned to the PBX, used for PBX installation management. This option is only available in some countries/areas. To view the Flash ROM ID • From the Utility menu, click Flash ROM ID Information. PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 95: Help

    Is the USB cable firmly connected to both the PC and the PBX? • Is the USB driver on the PC running? To confirm, open the Windows Device Manager, and look for "Panasonic KX-TDA USB Main Unit driver" in the USB Controllers section. If it is not present, re-install the USB driver.
  • Page 96 2.7 Help The Maintenance Console cannot connect to the PBX via modem. • Is the dial number of the modem correct? For more details, see 2.18.1 [11-1] Main. • Has a modem been installed to the PBX? • Are the modem settings of the PBX and Maintenance Console correct? For more details, see 2.18.1 [11-1] Main.
  • Page 97 2.7 Help I cannot change an LCO port to INS status. • Is the card installed in the appropriate slot? • Is the card installed in the correct slot, but not functioning correctly? Check the condition of the card. • Is the card itself in INS status? Set it to INS status.
  • Page 98 2.7 Help • Turn the Portable Station off and back on again, to force it to re-register its location. If I delete the extension number of a Portable Station, and then turn the Portable Station off and back on again, it does not function correctly. •...
  • Page 99 2.7 Help • Perform the following steps: Confirm that the Numbering Plan you will change is not currently being used by any extensions (see 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View). If it is being used by extensions, temporarily change the extension numbers of those extensions to that of another numbering plan, or delete the extension number (see 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings and 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings).
  • Page 100 2.7 Help • Perform the following steps: Open the 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main screen. Change the value in the Dial cell of the desired feature. Click Apply. I cannot change a feature number. • It is not possible to use the same number for 2 items. The number you are trying to store cannot be used if it is already being used by: •...
  • Page 101 2.7 Help If I reset the PBX directly after modifying settings, the modified settings are not updated in the PBX. • When you click Apply, the settings are updated in the PBX, but are not yet saved to the SD memory card. If system data is not saved to the SD memory card, the PBX will restore the data that was last saved to the card in the event that the PBX is reset, or power is turned off and back on again.
  • Page 102 2.7 Help • The following setting data is not saved to the SD memory card, so will be deleted when the PBX is initialised. This data is stored in the PBX's battery backup memory. • Incoming Call Log • Outgoing Call Log (including Last Number Redial) •...
  • Page 103 • From the 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) screen, set the Port Type of the port you want to use to either "QSIG-Slave" or "QSIG-Master". How do I change the type of an extension port? •...
  • Page 104 2.7 Help • Calls between extensions can be restricted from the 2.9.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service— Internal Call Block screen. Click in the relevant cells to select the COS levels whose extensions are blocked from calling each other. How do I restrict trunk calls made by extensions? •...
  • Page 105 2.7 Help • Perform the following steps: On the 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List screen, from the Incoming Call Distribution drop-down list, select the group you want to modify. The ICD group must have an extension number set. Enter the extension number of the extension you want to add in a blank cell of the Extension Number column.

  • Page 106: 1] Configuration

    2.8 [1] Configuration [1] Configuration 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot The operating characteristics associated with each service card can be programmed. Move the mouse pointer over an installed card to display the menu of options for that card. To view a summary of status and MPR versions for all cards installed in the PBX, click the Summary button (see 2.8.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary).
  • Page 107 Move the mouse pointer over the card. A menu will be shown under the mouse pointer. Select Option Card. The OPB3 Option Card Setup screen will be displayed. See 2.8.43 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only). Supported Card Types KX-TDA30 Card...
  • Page 108 EXT-CID: Extension Caller ID Card SVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX-TDA30 Installation Manual. KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming MPR: Main Processing Card 1 (fixed in Slot 00) 2.8.3 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - MPR...
  • Page 109 DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card 2.8.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type KX-TDA100: 6 SLC8: 8-Port Single Line Telephone KX-TDA200: 8 Extension Card SLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension Card...
  • Page 110 Card Maximum Quantity Card Programming CTI-LINK: CTI Link Card 2.8.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - KX-TDA100: 1 CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- KX-TDA200: 1 TDA600 only) For more information on cards and card installation, see "1.3.1 Optional Equipment" in the KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200 Installation Manual.
  • Page 111 PRI23: PRI Card (23B channels) PRI30: PRI Card (30B channels) T1: T-1 Trunk Card 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) E1: E-1 Trunk Card 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type E&M8: 8-Port E & M Trunk Card 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM...

  • Page 112: 1-1] Slot-Summary

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Summary information is displayed for all cards installed in the PBX. For the KX-TDA600, when the PBX has more than two shelves, click a tab to select the shelves to view. Indicates the slot number (reference only). Value Range Available slot numbers.
  • Page 113 2.8 [1] Configuration E1: E-1 Trunk Card MPR: MPR Card Card Type for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: DHLC8: 8-Port Digital Hybrid Extension Card DLC16: 16-Port Digital Extension Card DLC8: 8-Port Digital Extension Card MSLC16: 16-Port Single Line Telephone Extension with Message Lamp Card...
  • Page 114 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type...
  • Page 115 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.2 [1-1] Slot—Summary Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Version Indicates the LPR version of the installed card (reference only). For IP-EXT16 cards, both the LPR version and the VoIP version are displayed. The LPR version is shown on the left, and the VoIP version on the right, as follows: (Example) 1.002 / 1.001 For IP-EXT4 cards, only the VoIP version is displayed.

  • Page 116: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Mpr

    MEC/EMEC card properties can be viewed and set. Memory Expansion Card: Indicates whether an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is mounted on the MPR (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMPR (KX-TDA600) card. To change the EMEC or MEC card installation status, click on this cell, then click OK in the dialogue box that appears.
  • Page 117 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 2.3.8 Software Upgrading PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 118: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Extension Type

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type The property for the extension cards can be specified. KX-T7250 Transfer/Hold Key Mode Selects whether the control signals sent by the Transfer and Hold buttons on KX-T7250 PTs are reversed or not. Value Range Mode 1: Does not switch the control signals Mode 2: Switches the control signals...
  • Page 119 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Off Hook Guard Time Specifies the length of guard time used for off-hook signals from SLTs, to prevent the PBX mistaking them for pulse dials. Value Range 8 × n (n=12–63) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 120 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect the flash signal sent when an SLT user presses the hookswitch or the Flash/Recall button. Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the line to prevent placing the call on hold. Enable: The PBX places the call on consultation hold.
  • Page 121 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Selects the voltage that enables an SLT to activate the Message Waiting lamp. This setting is only available with MSLC/EMSLC cards. Value Range 85 V, 145 V Maintenance Console Location 2.8.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type...
  • Page 122 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range None, Caller ID Maintenance Console Location 2.8.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type Installation Manual References For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 2.5.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) For KX-TDA600: 2.7.6 EXT-CID Card (KX-TDA0168) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 123: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. To view total numbers of each type of extension connected, click Port Type View. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 124 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Port Type Indicates the port type (reference only). Value Range DPT: DPT port (DLC) SLT: SLT port (SLC/MSLC/ESLC/EMSLC/CSLC/ECSLC) S-Hybrid: Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(SLT): XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 125 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command as follows: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 126 2.8 [1] Configuration Extension Name Specifies the extension name of the port. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None XDP Mode Turns XDP mode on or off for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to S-Hybrid.
  • Page 127 Value Range Normal: For connecting a DPT DSS: For connecting a DSS Console (A maximum of 4 [with the KX-TDA30], 8 [with the KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200] or 64 [with the KX-TDA600] DSS Consoles can be connected to the PBX.) VM (DPT): For connecting a Panasonic VPS through DPT Integration PC Console: For connecting a PC Console (A maximum of 2 [with the KX-TDA30] or 8 [with the KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600] PC Consoles can be connected to the PBX.)
  • Page 128 If you do not wish to delete SDN buttons for this port, click Cancel. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Location number for DSS Console: 1–4 Location number for PC Console: 1, 2 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: Location number for DSS Console: 1–64 Location number for PC Console: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port...
  • Page 129 Specifies the VM port number for the port. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to DPT or S-Hybrid. Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–4 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 130 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 131: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Connection Command

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Commands for the extension ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 132: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Extension Port-Port Type View

    With the KX-TDA30, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of extension ports to which they are connected; with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600, CSs are counted on the basis of the number of CSIF ports in service plus the number of extension ports to which CSs are connected.

  • Page 133: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 134 OUS: The CS is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the CS. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-...

  • Page 135: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Csi/F Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Puts the Cell Station (CS) in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.9 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.8 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - CSI/F Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Takes the CS out of service.

  • Page 136: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Lco Type

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type The properties of the analogue trunk cards can be specified. Outgoing Guard Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 3–6 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 137 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Bell Detection—Bell Start Detection Timer Specifies the minimum length of a bell signal that can be recognised by the PBX as the bell signal sent from the telephone company, before the PBX detects an arriving call.
  • Page 138 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse / DTMF Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 139 2.8 [1] Configuration Low Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a low speed pulse dial. Low Speed Pulse Dial— Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Value Range 4 ×...
  • Page 140 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None High Speed Pulse Dial—Break Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a high speed pulse dial. High Speed Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break on this screen determines the value that can be specified here. Value Range 4 ×...
  • Page 141 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Option Card Equipment—Option 1 and Option 2 Indicates the type of the card that is installed on the LCOT/ELCOT card (reference only). Value Range None, Caller ID Card Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Caller ID Detection...
  • Page 142 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Carrier Detection Enables the PBX to detect the carrier when receiving Caller ID. To enable this setting, Caller ID— Caller ID Signalling on this screen should be set to FSK. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 143 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (FSK) Detection Start Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before attempting to detect Caller ID information, after receiving a call.
  • Page 144 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID (DTMF) Information Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of the information segment of a Caller ID series. Value Range None, *, #, A, B, C, D Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 145 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Pay Tone—Pay Tone Frequency (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Selects the frequency of the pay tone appropriate to your telephone company. Value Range 12kHz, 16kHz Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type...
  • Page 146 None Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - MIN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the minimum length that a received pay tone signal must be for the PBX to recognise it as a pay tone signal. Value Range 8 ×...
  • Page 147 2.8 [1] Configuration Pay Tone—Pay Tone Pulse - Interval (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the maximum length of time between pay tone signals. Value Range 8 × n (n=1–250) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.10 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - LCO type Programming Manual References...

  • Page 148: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Various settings can be programmed for each analogue trunk port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References...

  • Page 149: Busy Out Status

    2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 150 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming Specifies the length of time required by the PBX to detect a CPC signal on outgoing or incoming trunk calls before disconnecting the line.
  • Page 151 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range Low, High Maintenance Console Location 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Reverse Detection Selects the type of trunk call for which the reverse signal from the telephone company is detected. Value Range Disable: For no trunk call Outgoing: For outgoing trunk calls only...
  • Page 152 2.8 [1] Configuration Pay Tone Detection (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Enables the PBX to receive a pay tone signal from the telephone company. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.3 Call Charge Services...
  • Page 153 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Programming Manual References...

  • Page 154: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Lco Port-Connection Command

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command Commands for the LCO ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.12 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 155: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Bri Type/Pri Type

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type The properties of the BRI or PRI (available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) card can be specified. ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T200 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the L2 command to ISDN.
  • Page 156 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN. Value Range 0–18000 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 157 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T304 Specifies the maximum time allowed between each digit on an outgoing call. Applies to overlap sending.
  • Page 158 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 0–600 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call.
  • Page 159 2.8 [1] Configuration ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T313 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Connect message. Value Range 0–600 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 160 2.8 [1] Configuration ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T319 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Suspend message. Value Range 0–600 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 161 2.8 [1] Configuration ISDN CO / QSIG Master / QSIG Slave—T3D9 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect L2 in "Call by Call" mode. Value Range 0–3000 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 162 2.8 [1] Configuration ISDN Extension—T203 Specifies the length of time to detect no communication status of L2. Value Range 0–600 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T301 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after making a call to ISDN.
  • Page 163 2.8 [1] Configuration ISDN Extension—T303 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the SETUP (call setting) message to ISDN. Value Range 0–600 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 164 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T306 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the DISC (disconnection) message to ISDN. This setting is used when inband tones are supplied. Value Range 0–3000 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 165 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T309 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to disconnect the data link, before disconnecting the call. Value Range 0–3000 × 100 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 166 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T316 Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for a reply after sending the Restart message. Value Range 0–3000 ×...
  • Page 167 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.13 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - BRI type/PRI type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Extension—T3D3 Specifies the length of time that the PBX tries to establish L2 in "Permanent" mode. Value Range 0–3000 ×...

  • Page 168: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Bri Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Various settings can be programmed for each BRI port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Main Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 169 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 170 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References 2.8.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None LLC Information Enables the PBX to send LLC (Low Level Compatibility) information to the network when an outgoing call is made when the ISDN bearer mode is speech. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 171 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range Ignore: Ignore the Status Message from the network. Disconnect: Disconnect the call. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN CO Parameters for ISDN CO are not applicable for the BRI extension port. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 172 2.8 [1] Configuration Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 173 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 2.8.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max.
  • Page 174 2.8 [1] Configuration telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires. Overlap: The PBX sends dialled digits one at a time. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Extension Inter-digit 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 2—ISDN en Bloc Dial—[#] as End of Dial for en Bloc mode 2.10.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Feature Guide References...
  • Page 175 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen has been set to QSIG-Slave or QSIG-Master. A maximum of two ports of each BRI card can be assigned to transmit extension status information.
  • Page 176 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 177 2.8 [1] Configuration Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
  • Page 178 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension ISDN Extension Progress Tone Enables the PBX to send call progress tones to the ISDN extension. This setting is only available when Port Type on this screen is set to Extension. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 179 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 180 2.8 [1] Configuration Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Value Range INS: The port is in service.
  • Page 181 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY L2 Mode Selects the active mode of L2 (Layer 2) on the BRI port. Value Range Call, Permanent Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 182 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 183 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 184 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the port. Value Range Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private...
  • Page 185 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 186 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 187 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range CO: For connecting to public network Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 188 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC) 1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) 1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN 1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) 1.30.4.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) and Calling/Connected...
  • Page 189 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type.
  • Page 190 2.8 [1] Configuration • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Programming Manual References 2.8.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command...
  • Page 191 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 192: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Bri Port-Connection Command

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Commands for the BRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 193: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Main Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 194 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the port type. Notes • Each ISDN connection in a QSIG network must have a master port on one PBX and a slave port on another PBX.
  • Page 195 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Status Message Specifies whether the Status Message is sent to the network.
  • Page 196 It is usually a 16- to 32-bit character. (Assignable only when using the PRI30 card.) Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Coding Selects the line coding type of the PRI PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the port.
  • Page 197 CO Setting parameters are not applicable to ports assigned as Extension in Port Type. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 198 Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 199 Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
  • Page 200 Enables the use of the telephone company's ISDN Centrex Service features. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Networking Data Transfer Enables transmission of extension status data to connected PBXs in a network.
  • Page 201 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Extension Setting Extension Setting parameters are applicable only for the PRI extension port.
  • Page 202 2.8 [1] Configuration Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Type Selects the type of the port.

  • Page 203: Network Configuration

    OUS: The port is out of service. Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-...
  • Page 204 Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 205 2.8 [1] Configuration QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only).
  • Page 206 Network Numbering Plan Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 207 Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 208 Selects the trunk property of the port. Value Range Public: Public network VPN: Virtual Private Network Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Calling Party number—Numbering Plan ID—Public, Private...
  • Page 209 Selects the numbering plan ID that applies to incoming trunk calls routed through public and private networks. Value Range Unknown, ISDN-Telephony, National Standard, Private Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private...
  • Page 210 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 211 Extension: For connecting to extension QSIG-Slave: For connecting to private network (slave port) QSIG-Master: For connecting to private network (master port) Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 212 For COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E: No, Yes For 3PTY: No, Yes-3Pty Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
  • Page 213 CCBS feature from the network. CCBS Type on this screen specifies the applicable type of call. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)

  • Page 214: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Pri Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Commands for the PRI ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Takes the port out of service.

  • Page 215: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - T1 Type (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Line Coding Selects the line coding type of T1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) used. Value Range B8ZS, AMI Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Frame Sequence Selects the type of frame sequence used for communications.
  • Page 216 None LIU Send Option Selects the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU. Value Range Mode-1–Mode-8 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Receive Option Selects the receiving level (Receive Equalisation) of LIU.
  • Page 217 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
  • Page 218 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 32 × n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 219 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range n-42–0 (n=0–31) dB Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse % Break Specifies the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between the break (on-hook) signal and make (off-hook) signal in a pulse dial.
  • Page 220 Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly. Value Range 630 ms, 830 ms, 1030 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—CO Feed Back Tone...
  • Page 221 Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 × n (n=1–5) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (OPX)
  • Page 222 Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an SLT connected to an OPX that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal. Value Range 8 × n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Signal Detection (TIE)
  • Page 223 Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal received from a TIE line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal. Value Range 8 × n (n=3–191) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code...
  • Page 224 Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 2.8.18 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - T1 type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...

  • Page 225: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 226 INS: The channel is in service. OUS: The channel is out of service. Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 227 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Channel Type Selects the channel type. Value Range Undefined: Not assigned...
  • Page 228 This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI/DID. Value Range None, 80 × n (n=2–75) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection...
  • Page 229 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the T1 channel.
  • Page 230 Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 231 2.8 [1] Configuration This setting is only available when Channel Type on this screen is set to DDI/DID. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 232 Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

  • Page 233: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - T1 Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Commands for the T1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Takes the channel out of service.

  • Page 234: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type The properties of the E1 card can be specified. To adjust related settings, click Line Signal Setting, MFC-R2 Setting 1, and MFC-R2 Setting 2. Line Coding Selects the line coding type of E1 PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) for the E1 card. Value Range HDB3, AMI Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 235 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Dial Timer (DDI/DID/TIE) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 236 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None LIU Send Option Indicates the transmitting level (Transmit Pulse Amplitude) of LIU (reference only). Value Range Mode 1–Mode 8 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 237 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DTMF Tone—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the DTMF inter-digit pause. Value Range 64 + 16 × n (n=0–11) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 238 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of the pulse inter-digit pause. This allows the telephone company to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 239 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 8 × n (n=9–20) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Minimum MAKE Width Specifies the minimum length of the make signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ×...
  • Page 240 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 8 × n (n=3–63) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Flash Width Specifies the maximum length of a flash signal sent from an E1 line that the PBX can recognise as a hookswitch flash signal.
  • Page 241 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 2.8.21 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the end of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 242: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Line Signal Setting

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting DR2 Setting Type Selects the control type of the DR2 (Digital System R2) signal. Value Range Normal, Option-1, Option-3 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 243 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Bit Position for Clear Back Selects the position of the clear-back signal control bit in a DR2 signal. Value Range A-bit, B-bit, A&B-bit Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 244 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None E&M Signalling Type Selects the control bit of an E & M signal. Value Range Type-1:A bit=0, Type-2:A bit=1, Type-3:B bit=0, Type-4:B bit=1, Type-5:A bit=1,B bit=1 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 245 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer Specifies the length of an answer signal. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None E&M-P Pulse Length—Clear Specifies the length of a clear signal.
  • Page 246 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Meter Pulse Detection—Mode Specifies the mode for call charge meter pulses. Value Range No Detection: Meter pulses are not sent or received. Outgoing call only: Sends a call charge meter pulse for outgoing trunk calls. Both calls: Sends and receives call charge meter pulses.
  • Page 247 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment—DTMF Transmit Specifies the output power of the DTMF signal sent from the DSP (Digital Signal Processor). Value Range -12 dB–3 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 248 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSP Gain Adjustment—MFC-R2 Receive Specifies the strength range within which an MFC-R2 signal must be for the DSP to recognise it as an MFC-R2 signal. Value Range -38 - 0 dB – -23 - 0 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References...
  • Page 249 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.22 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—Line Signal Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 250: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 1

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 ANI Service—Mode Selects the ANI (Automatic Number Identification) service mode. Value Range None: ANI service is not activated. Incoming call only: Receives the caller's number from the E1 line. Outgoing call only: Sends the caller's number to the E1 line.
  • Page 251 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MFC-R2 Timer—Backward Specifies the maximum time that the PBX waits for an MFC-R2 backward signal sent from the telephone company. Value Range 1–30 s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 252 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-l Code Assignment—ANI Complete (1)–(4) Specifies the code used to indicate the end of an ANI number. Value Range ANI Complete (1): 1–15 ANI Complete (2)–(4): Undefined, 1–15...
  • Page 253 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-l Code Assignment—End of Digit Timer Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits for further signal before detecting the end of digit of an ANI number.
  • Page 254 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-ll Code Assignment—Group-ll ANI Specifies the Group-ll ANI start code. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 255 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.23 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 1 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 256: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - E1 Type-Mfc-R2 Setting 2

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Group-A Code Assignment—Address Complete Specifies the address complete (completion of dial reception) code sent to the telephone company. Value Range 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 257 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—ANI (N+1) Additional Code Specifies the second code when two codes are needed to request the telephone company to send the (N+1)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References...
  • Page 258 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 259 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Group-A Code Assignment—(N-3) Request Specifies the code used to request the telephone company to send the (N-3)th digit of an ANI number. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 260 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Idle (3) Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the status of the called destination is idle when the call is disconnected by the caller. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 261 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Congestion Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the network is congested. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 262 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.24 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - E1 type—MFC-R2 Setting 2 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Group-B Code Assignment—Collect Call Reject Specifies the code used to inform the telephone company that the collect call has been rejected. Value Range Undefined, 1–15 Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 263: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - E1 Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Various settings can be programmed for each E1 channel. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 264 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the channel status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the channel command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 265 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range Undefined: Not assigned DR2: Digital System R2 E&M-P: Pulsed E & M E&M-C: Continuous E & M Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.22.1 E1 Line Service Trunk Property Selects the trunk property of the E &...
  • Page 266 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection 1.22.1 E1 Line Service E1 Receiver Type Selects the type of signal the PBX receives from the E1 line. This should be set to MFC-R2 when receiving ANI (Automatic Number Identification) numbers from the E1 line.
  • Page 267 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.10 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection DTMF Width Selects the length of the DTMF tone sent to the E1 channel. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 268 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Start Signal Type Selects the type of the start signal. Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received.
  • Page 269 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 270 2.8 [1] Configuration Answer Wait Timer Selects the length of time that the PBX waits for the called outside party to answer an outgoing trunk call. The line will be disconnected automatically when this timer expires. Value Range None, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 271 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References None Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s, 4.0 s, 12.0 s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 272: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - E1 Port-Connection Command

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command Commands for the E1 channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.26 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 273: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Em Type (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Interface Selects E & M signal type. Value Range Continuous, Pulsed with Answer, Pulsed without Answer, Continuous No Answer Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None First Dial Timer (TIE) Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DDI/DID or TIE line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX.
  • Page 274 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Inter-digit Timer Specifies the pseudo-answer time. Value Range 3–15 s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 275 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 60 %, 67 % Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area.
  • Page 276 Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width...
  • Page 277 None Flash—Flash Detection Enables the PBX to detect hookswitch flash signals. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash—Minimum BREAK Width Specifies the minimum length of the break signal in a flash signal.
  • Page 278 Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Seizure Selects the length of a seizure pulse. Value Range 150 ms, 600 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Answer Selects the length of an answer pulse.
  • Page 279 Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—E&M-P Seizure ACK Enables the PBX to wait for an E & M-P seizure ACK signal. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Line Signal Setting—E&M-P Pulse Length—Wink Signal Width...
  • Page 280 Selects the delimiter used to separate multiple parameters in a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 2.8.27 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - EM type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID—Caller ID End Code...

  • Page 281: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Em Port (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    To change the status of channels, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 282 OUS: The channel is out of service. Fault: The channel is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-...
  • Page 283 Selects the type of signal used to dial out to the E & M line. Value Range DTMF, Pulse Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Gain Adjustment Indicates the value for hardware adjustment (fixed, reference only).
  • Page 284 Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the E & M line. Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection...
  • Page 285 E&M TIE Line Type Selects the type of the voice path for an E & M line. Value Range 2 wires, 4 wires Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Sending Caller ID to TIE Specifies whether Caller ID information is sent when Trunk Property on this screen is set to Private.
  • Page 286 Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 287 Flash Time Specifies the length of a flash signal. Value Range None, 16 × n (n=1–255) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.7 External Feature Access (EFA) Disconnect Time Specifies the length of time after a trunk is disconnected, during which the PBX cannot seize the line.

  • Page 288: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Em Port-Connection Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Commands for the E & M channels can be programmed. Puts the channel in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.29 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Takes the channel out of service.

  • Page 289: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Did Type

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type The property for the DID card can be specified. First Dial Timer Specifies the minimum time that the PBX waits after seizing a DID line, before sending the dialled digits to the telephone company or to another PBX. This allows the telephone company or the other PBX to have enough time to accept the dialled digits correctly.
  • Page 290 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Type Selects the type of pulse dial transmission appropriate to your area. Value Range Normal, Sweden, New Zealand Maintenance Console Location 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References...
  • Page 291 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Pulse Dial—Pulse Maximum BREAK Width Specifies the maximum length of the break signal in a pulse dial. Value Range 8 ×...
  • Page 292 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 32 × n (n=4–9) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Caller ID—Caller ID Start Code Selects the DTMF code used to detect the beginning of a Caller ID series. Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 293 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range *, #, A–D Maintenance Console Location 2.8.30 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DID type Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 294: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Did Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Various settings can be programmed for each DID port. To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References...
  • Page 295 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...
  • Page 296 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CO Pulse Speed Selects the speed at which pulse dials are sent to the line. Value Range 10 pulse/s, 20 pulse/s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 297 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range Immediate: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the First Dial Timer expires. Wink: Sends the dialled digits to the trunk when the wink signal is received. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 298 2.8 [1] Configuration Receiving Caller ID from CO Specifies whether Caller ID information is received from an analogue trunk. Value Range No, Yes Maintenance Console Location 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Send Ringback Tone to Outside Caller Enables the PBX to send a ringback tone to an outside caller when the network cannot send the tone.
  • Page 299 2.8 [1] Configuration Pause Time Specifies the length of a pause. Value Range 1.5 s, 2.5 s, 3.5 s, 4.5 s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.7 Pause Insertion 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.5.4.9 Special Carrier Access Code Flash Time...
  • Page 300 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 301: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Did Port-Connection Command

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command Commands for the DID ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.32 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 302: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Gateway

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway The properties of the VoIP Gateway card can be specified. En-bloc Dialling setting Selects the call dialling mode. Value Range En-bloc: The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after the extension user completes dialling. The PBX recognises the end of dialling when (1) # is dialled, if programmed, (2) a preprogrammed telephone number is dialled, or (3) the inter-digit timer expires.
  • Page 303 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.33 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Gateway Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG Maintenance Port Number (KX-TDA30 only) Specifies the default maintenance port number of the IP network. Value Range 10000–65535 Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 304: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port Status of the IP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only).
  • Page 305 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Connection Indicates the port status (reference only). This column offers two ways to open the screen to select the port command: • Click the desired cell in the column. •...

  • Page 306: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Gw Port-Connection Command

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command Commands for the IP-GW ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.35 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection Command Programming Manual References 2.8.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 307: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension The properties of the VoIP Extension card can be specified. To adjust settings related to IP-PT network data transmission, click Common Settings. IP Address Specifies the IP address of the card. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 308 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References 2.8.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Keep Alive Time Out Specifies the length of time that the PBX will continue to consider an IP-PT to be active even if it receives no transmissions from that IP-PT.
  • Page 309 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.8.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) DSP Digital Gain (Up) Specifies the DSP Digital Gain for the up voice path. Value Range -14–6 dB Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 310 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range Use Non-Linear Processor, Use Fixed TX Gain Maintenance Console Location 2.8.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 311: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ip Extension-Common Settings

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings IP network data transmission settings can be programmed. To activate any changes made to settings on this screen, it is necessary to set all installed IP-EXT cards to OUS, then back to INS. Gateway Address Specifies the default gateway address of the IP network.
  • Page 312 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 1024–65472 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 313: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Ip-Extension Port

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Various settings can be programmed for each IP extension port. To change the status of extension ports, click Command. IP-PT Registration and De-registration An IP-PT must be registered to the PBX by programming both the PBX and IP-PT before it can be used.
  • Page 314 2.8 [1] Configuration • If the de-registration is unsuccessful, the dialogue box will show "De-registration Error". De-registration will be terminated. Click Close. If the IP-PT is successfully de-registered, the status of the IP-PT will update to show "None". Forced De-registration Follow the steps below to forcibly de-register the IP-PT when normal de-registration has been unsuccessful or IP address settings have been changed or deleted only on the IP-PT.
  • Page 315 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Extension Number...
  • Page 316 2.8 [1] Configuration • Click the desired cell in the column. • Select the desired cell in the column, and then click Command. This cell is only active when Status on this screen shows Registered. Value Range INS: The port is in service. OUS: The port is out of service.
  • Page 317 2.8 [1] Configuration Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Headset OFF/ON Turns on or off the use of a headset with the IP-PT. Value Range Headset OFF, Headset ON Maintenance Console Location 2.8.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 318 2.8 [1] Configuration Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) Packet Sampling Time Specifies the time interval between measurements (samples) of sound data during a conversation. The smaller this number, the higher the quality of the transmitted sound. When IP Codec on this screen is set to G.711, only 20 ms and 30 ms are available.

  • Page 319: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Sip Gateway (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA30 only) The properties of the SIP-GW card can be specified. DSP Expansion Card Indicates whether the SIP-DSP card is installed (reference only). Value Range None, Installed Maintenance Console Location 2.8.39 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - SIP Gateway (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 320: 1-1] Slot-Port Property - Sip-Gw Port (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.40 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - SIP-GW Port (KX-TDA30 only) Status of the SIP-GW ports can be referred to, or set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). To change the status of ports, click Command. Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 321 2.8 [1] Configuration Fault: The port is not communicating with the network. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.40 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - SIP-GW Port (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Subscriber Number Specifies the number used as the CLIP number. Value Range Max.

  • Page 322: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Opb3 (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    To change the status of slots on the OPB card, click Command. Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only).
  • Page 323 None Feature Card Type Indicates the type of option card that is installed or pre-installed in each sub-slot (reference only). Note that for KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only one ECHO16 card can be installed per OPB3 card. Value Range MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card...

  • Page 324: Port Status

    2.8 [1] Configuration Idle: There is no card in the sub-slot, no programming of the card type for the sub-slot. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600...

  • Page 325: Device Type

    Device Type Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only). Value Range Relay, Ringer Maintenance Console Location 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Input Signal Decision Time Specifies the minimum duration of continuous input from the triggered sensor before the PBX recognises the input and makes a sensor call.
  • Page 326 Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as an SVM card. It is possible to use the ESVM card as an SVM card, MSG card, or both. Value Range Enable, Disable Maintenance Console Location 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) MSG Feature Specifies whether or not to use the ESVM card as a MSG card.

  • Page 327: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Opb3-Card Command (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx- Tda600 Only)

    Commands for the service cards installed on the OPB card can be programmed. Puts the card in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Takes the card out of service.
  • Page 328 ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 2.8.42 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3—Card Command (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Installation Manual References For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDA600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment...

  • Page 329: 1-1] Slot-Opb3 Option Card Setup (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    ECHO16: 16-Channel Echo Canceller Card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200 only) EIO4: 4-Port External Input/Output Card ESVM2: 2-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card ESVM4: 4-Channel Simplified Voice Message Card Maintenance Console Location 2.8.43 [1-1] Slot—OPB3 Option Card Setup (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Installation Manual References For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment For KX-TDA600: 1.3.1 Optional Equipment...
  • Page 330 2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Card Inserted Displays the type of option card currently installed to each slot of the OPB3 card. Value Range MSG4: 4-Channel Message Card DPH4: 4-Port Doorphone Card...

  • Page 331: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Ctilink (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    IP Address Specifies the IP address of the PBX. Value Range 1.0.0.0–223.255.255.255 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask of the PBX.
  • Page 332 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.44 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - CTILINK (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Maintenance Port Number Specifies a port number used to operate Maintenance Console via LAN.

  • Page 333: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Dph Type (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) The status of the DPH ports can be viewed, and set to INS (in service) or OUS (out of service). Slot Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.8.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only)
  • Page 334 2.8 [1] Configuration Maintenance Console Location 2.8.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide References None For Output (EIO)—Device Type Selects the type of connected output device (for output ports only). Value Range Relay, Ringer, Door Opener (DPH4 only) Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 335 2.8 [1] Configuration Value Range 10 × n (n=1–255) s Maintenance Console Location 2.8.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 336: 1-1] Slot-Card Property - Dph Type-Connection Command (Kx-Tda30 Only)

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) Commands for the DPH ports can be programmed. Puts the port in service. Value Range Not applicable. Maintenance Console Location 2.8.46 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type—Connection Command (KX-TDA30 only) Programming Manual References 2.8.45 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - DPH type (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide References...

  • Page 337: 1-2] Portable Station

    2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station Various portable station (PS) settings can be programmed. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), 256 (with the KX-TDA600) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600 with EMEC card installed) PSs can be registered.
  • Page 338 For KX-TDA30: 2.7.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 2.8.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX 2.9.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the Hybrid IP-PBX For KX-TDA600: 2.10.7 Connecting a Cell Station to the PBX...
  • Page 339 None Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Index Indicates the PS number (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–28 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–128 For KX-TDA600: 1–512 Maintenance Console Location 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25 Portable Station (PS) Features...
  • Page 340 2.8 [1] Configuration Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station Programming Manual References 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name Feature Guide References 1.25.1 Portable Station (PS) Connection Status Indicates whether a certain PS is registered (reference only).

  • Page 341: 1-3] Option

    2.8 [1] Configuration 2.8.48 [1-3] Option System options can be programmed. It is possible to clear the master CS information (Master CS Port and Radio System ID) by following the procedure below in batch mode: Click Clear Master CS. Click Yes. To abort the procedure, click No. If the system data is downloaded to the PBX after the master CS information has been cleared, it is necessary to register all PSs again in the interactive mode.
  • Page 342 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None New Card Installation—ISDN Standard Mode for PRI23 Card (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies whether a PRI23 card is automatically set to ISDN Standard mode or T1-LCOT mode when it is installed for the first time.

  • Page 343: 1-4] Clock Priority

    Selects and prioritises slot numbers for the BRI, PRI, T1, and E1 cards (the PRI, T1, and E1 cards are available with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) that are used to forward a clock pulse from an external source to the PBX.

  • Page 344: 2] System

    2.9 [2] System [2] System 2.9.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving The date and time of the PBX, and Summer time (daylight saving time) can be programmed. Summer time sets the clock one hour forward at 2:00 AM on the start date, and one hour back at 2:00 AM on the end date.
  • Page 345 2.9 [2] System End Date—Year, Month, Day Specifies the end date of daylight savings time. Value Range Year: 2000–2099 Month: 1–12 Day: 1–31 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.1 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.5 Automatic Setup PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 346: 2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving-Date & Time Setting

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.2 [2-1] Date & Time/Daylight Saving—Date & Time Setting The date and time of the PBX can be programmed. The date and time will be shown on the display of extensions (e.g., PT, PS). Date & Time Indicates the current date and time.

  • Page 347: 2-2] Operator & Bgm

    2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 2.2.5 Operator Features BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/ KX-TDA600 only) Selects the audio source of BGM2. Value Range External BGM Port 2, Internal BGM 1, Internal BGM 2 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.3 [2-2] Operator &...
  • Page 348 Selects the audio source for Music on Hold. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Tone, BGM For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Tone, BGM 1 (External BGM Port 1), BGM 2 (Internal 1/2 or External 2) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM Programming Manual References...
  • Page 349 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 350: 2-3] Timers & Counters

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Various system timers and counters can be programmed. Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone Automatic Redial—Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times Automatic Redial is attempted before being cancelled. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 351 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Automatic Redial—Analogue CO Mute / Busy Detection Timer Specifies the length of time before the PBX stops muting the caller's voice and cancels busy tone detection when Automatic Redial to analogue trunk is performed.
  • Page 352 2.9 [2] System Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.2 Automatic Extension Release Dial—Extension Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits must be dialled before the PBX sends a reorder tone.
  • Page 353 2.9 [2] System Dial—Analogue CO Inter-digit Specifies the length of time within which subsequent digits of a telephone number must be sent to an analogue trunk. If no digit is sent before this time expires, the PBX recognises end of dialling and stops muting the caller's voice over the analogue trunk.
  • Page 354 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Intercept No Answer Time—Intercept No Answer Time—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Recall—Hold Recall Specifies the length of time until the holding extension receives a Hold Recall ring or alarm tone when a held call remains unretrieved.
  • Page 355 2.9 [2] System Value Range 1–240 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.13.2 Call Park Recall—Disconnect after Recall Specifies the length of time after an extension with a trunk call on hold receives a Hold Recall tone that the held call is disconnected.
  • Page 356 2.9 [2] System Tone Length—Reorder Tone for PT Handset Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is heard when using a PT handset. The PT will return to idle status when this timer expires. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 357 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.12.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—Mute & OGM Start Timer after Answering Specifies the length of time until the caller hears an OGM after reaching the DISA line. Value Range 0.0–12.0 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 358 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 2.12.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) DISA—Intercept Timer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the length of time until an unanswered DISA call is intercepted and redirected to the intercept routing destination after the original destination receives the call in each time mode.
  • Page 359 2.9 [2] System DISA—CO-to-CO Call Prolong Counter Specifies the number of times that the caller can prolong a trunk-to-trunk call on a DISA line. (Selecting "0" enables the caller to prolong the trunk-to-trunk call without restriction.) Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 360 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.17.5 Outgoing Message (OGM) DISA—Reorder Tone Duration Specifies the length of time that a reorder tone is sent to the caller before the call is disconnected. Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 2.12.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References...
  • Page 361 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Doorphone—Open Duration Specifies the length of time that a door stays unlocked after being opened from an extension. Value Range 2–7 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open...
  • Page 362 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder—Alarm Ringing Duration Specifies the length of time that an alarm rings. Value Range 10 × n (n=1–30) s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder...
  • Page 363 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.14.1.2 Conference Unattended Conference—Disconnect Timer Specifies the length of time until an Unattended Conference is disconnected after the parties involved in the conference receive a warning tone but the conference originator does not return to the conference.
  • Page 364 2.9 [2] System Caller ID—Visual Caller ID Display Specifies the length of time that a Caller ID number, with the Call Waiting tone offered by an analogue line from the telephone company, is shown on the display. The Caller ID number flashes on the display for five seconds, followed by a 10-second pause, then flashes again for five seconds.
  • Page 365 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor Incoming Call Inter-digit Timer—DDI / DID Specifies the length of time between digits when receiving a DDI/DID number from a public network. The call will be redirected to a PBX operator when this timer expires.
  • Page 366 2.9 [2] System Value Range 1–15 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Voice Mail (Caller from VM to CO)—On-hook Wait Time Specifies the length of time from when the VPS seizes a trunk (for example, to transfer a call) until the VPS goes on hook.
  • Page 367 2.9 [2] System During Conversation—DTMF Inter-digit Pause Specifies the length of time between DTMF signals when numbers are dialled in succession from a PT or PS during a conversation. Value Range 64 + 16 × n (n=0–15) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers &...
  • Page 368 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.30.6.1 PS Roaming by Network ICD Group SVM—Recording Time Specifies the maximum length of a message recorded by the SVM feature. Value Range 1–600 s Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 2.11.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message 2.11.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Feature Guide References...
  • Page 369 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Programming Manual References 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Broadcasting Operation 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Miscellaneous—Broadcasting Operation 2.10.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group Feature Guide References 1.16.1 Broadcasting PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 370: 2-4] Week Table

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.5 [2-4] Week Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation depending on the time of day. The time mode can be switched either automatically or manually. Select the desired switching mode from the Time Service Switching Mode option.

  • Page 371: 2-4] Week Table-Time Setting

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting The start times of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Time Table, as well as the start and end times of up to 3 break periods. 1.
  • Page 372 2.9 [2] System Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.6 [2-4] Week Table—Time Setting Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Hour, Minute Specifies the start time for each break period. Times can only be set when 2. Break—Break 1–3 Start—Setting is set to Enable.
  • Page 373 2.9 [2] System 2.2.4 Time Service PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 374: 2-5] Holiday Table

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.7 [2-5] Holiday Table A specific time mode (day, night, lunch, or break) can be selected for operation during holidays. Select the desired time mode from the Holiday Mode list. The start and end dates of a maximum of 24 different holidays can be programmed. Holiday Table—Setting Enables the setting of the holiday.
  • Page 375 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Month Specifies the month of the holiday end date. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.7 [2-5] Holiday Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Holiday Table—End Date—Day Specifies the day of the holiday end date.

  • Page 376: 2-6-1] Numbering Plan-Main

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Details of the extension numbering schemes, feature access numbers, numbers to access other PBXs in a network, and KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling numbers can be programmed here. For more information on flexible numbering, see "2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering" in the Feature Guide.

  • Page 377: Trunk Group Access

    2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References None Features Feature numbers to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a dial tone. Operator Call Specifies the feature number used to call the operator. Value Range Max.
  • Page 378 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None TIE Line Access Specifies the feature number used to make a TIE line call. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 379: Doorphone Call

    2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.11.4 [4-1-3] Wired Extension—Speed Dial 2.13.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System Personal Speed Dialling - Programming Specifies the feature number used to programme Personal Speed Dialling numbers at an extension. Value Range Max.

  • Page 380: Single Co Line Access

    2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.10.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging External BGM On / Off Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to turn on or off the external BGM.

  • Page 381: Directed Call Pickup

    2.9 [2] System Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parallel Telephone (Ring) Mode Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel an SLT connected in parallel with a DPT to ring when receiving an incoming call.

  • Page 382: Group Paging Answer

    2.9 [2] System Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Call Pickup Deny Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup TAFAS Answer...
  • Page 383 2.9 [2] System Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.8.1 Automatic Callback Busy (Camp-on) User Remote Operation / Walking COS / Verification Code Specifies the feature number used to change the COS of an extension temporarily, and also change the feature settings (for example, FWD, DND) of an extension from another extension or through DISA.

  • Page 384: Account Code Entry

    2.9 [2] System Account Code Entry Specifies the feature number used to enter an Account Code. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.3 Account Code Entry Call Hold / Call Hold Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call or retrieve a call on hold from the holding extension.

  • Page 385: Door Open

    2.9 [2] System Call Park / Call Park Retrieve Specifies the feature number used to hold a call in a parking zone or retrieve a call held in a parking zone. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 386 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.17.2 Door Open External Relay Access Specifies the feature number used to activate a relay. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.12.6 [5-4] External Relay Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control...
  • Page 387 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT,...
  • Page 388 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—Subscriber Number 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Subscriber Number 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 1—CLIP ID 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 1—CLIP ID Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
  • Page 389 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Message Waiting, or call back the caller. Value Range Max.
  • Page 390 2.9 [2] System Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD/DND for incoming intercom calls.
  • Page 391 2.9 [2] System Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel FWD for incoming trunk and intercom calls to an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 392: Walking Extension

    2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call Pickup Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Call Pickup Deny (i.e., preventing other extensions from picking up calls to your extension).

  • Page 393: Manual Call Waiting For Extension Call

    2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.3 Walking Extension Data Line Security Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Data Line Security (i.e., preventing signals from other extensions during data transmission).
  • Page 394 2.9 [2] System Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting Executive Override Deny Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel Executive Busy Override (i.e., preventing other extensions from joining your conversation).

  • Page 395: Incoming Call Queue Monitor

    2.9 [2] System Log-in / Log-out Specifies the feature number used to join or leave an incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.2.2.7 Log-in/Log-out...
  • Page 396 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Absent Message Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel the display of an Absent Message. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...
  • Page 397 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.28.4 Timed Reminder Timed Reminder Set / Cancel Specifies the feature number used to set or cancel a Timed Reminder. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 398 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Time Service (Day / Lunch / Break / Night) Switch Specifies the feature number, available for manager extensions, used to change the time mode manually. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References...

  • Page 399: Extension Feature Clear

    2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—Programming & Manager—Manager Feature Guide References 1.9.3 Extension Dial Lock Extension Feature Clear Specifies the feature number used to reset certain features of an extension to the default values. Value Range Max.

  • Page 400: Busy Out Cancel

    2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) Broadcasting Operation Specifies the feature number used to make a broadcasting call. Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers &...

  • Page 401: Simplified Voice Message Access

    2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main Programming Manual References 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO Feature Guide References 1.5.4.6 Trunk Busy Out Simplified Voice Message Access Specifies the feature number used to access the SVM feature to record, listen to and delete messages.
  • Page 402 2.9 [2] System KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) The settings of the MESSAGE button and One-touch buttons on the KX-T7710 can be programmed. Dial Indicates the DTMF tone dial required by the PBX to recognise it and dial the preprogrammed number for each button (reference only).
  • Page 403 2.9 [2] System One-touch Dial 01–08—Phone Number Specifies the number dialled when a one-touch button on the KX-T7710 is pressed. This is available only when the position of the Mode switch lever on the KX-T7710 is set to "PBX". Value Range Max.

  • Page 404: 2-6-2] Numbering Plan-Quick Dial

    A maximum of 80 Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. When an EMEC/MEC card is installed in the PBX, a maximum of 4000 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) or 1000 (with the KX- TDA30) Quick Dialling numbers can be programmed. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab.
  • Page 405 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling 1.30.2 Voice over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Network 2.3.6 Flexible Numbering/Fixed Numbering Phone Number Specifies the number to be dialled when the corresponding Quick Dialling number is used. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Programming Manual References...

  • Page 406: 2-6-3] Numbering Plan-B/Na Dnd Call Feature

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature Feature numbers used to access various PBX features can be programmed. The following features are available while hearing a busy, DND, or ringback tone. Each feature must have a unique feature number.
  • Page 407 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override Alternate Calling - Ring / Voice Specifies the feature number used to allow a caller to change the called extension's preset call receiving method to ring tone or voice. Value Range 1 digit (0–9, *, or #) Maintenance Console Location 2.9.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature...

  • Page 408: Automatic Callback Busy

    2.9 [2] System 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Executive Override Deny Feature Guide References 1.8.3 Call Monitor Automatic Callback Busy Specifies the feature number used to reserve a busy line and receive callback ringing when the line becomes idle.
  • Page 409 2.9 [2] System 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 410: 2-7-1] Class Of Service-Cos Settings

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Each extension, doorphone port, incoming call distribution group, and trunk group is assigned a Class of Service (COS). Certain features can be programmed to behave differently depending on the COS. A maximum of 64 COS levels can be programmed. Restrictions to features related to making trunk calls can be programmed for each COS.
  • Page 411 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) TRS Level on Extension Lock Specifies the TRS/Barring level for making trunk calls when an extension is locked using the Extension Dial Lock feature. Value Range 1: Allows all trunk calls 2–6: Restricts trunk calls according to the combination of the Denied and Exception Code Tables 7: Restricts all trunk calls Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 412: Transfer To Co

    2.9 [2] System CO & SMDR COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Extension-CO Line Call Duration Limit Enables the extension-to-trunk call duration feature.

  • Page 413: Account Code Mode

    2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer Call Forward to CO Enables the forwarding of calls to trunks. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS...
  • Page 414 2.9 [2] System Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.4 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-MP) 1.21.1.5 Call Forwarding (CF)—by ISDN (P-P) Outgoing CO Call Printout (SMDR) Enables the automatic recording of information about outgoing trunk calls on SMDR.

  • Page 415: Executive Busy Override

    2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Executive Busy Override Enables interrupting an existing call to establish a three-party conference call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS Feature Guide References...
  • Page 416 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS Feature Guide References 1.8.4 Second Call Notification to Busy Extension 1.8.4.3 Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) 1.8.4.4 Whisper OHCA Call Monitor Enables listening to a busy extension's conversation.

  • Page 417: Executive Busy Override Deny

    2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup Programming & Manager COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Executive Busy Override Deny Enables preventing other extensions from interrupting calls.

  • Page 418: Programming Mode Level

    2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Programming Mode Level Specifies the level of authorisation for performing PT programming.
  • Page 419 Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) An SDN button allows a PT user to see the current status of the corresponding PDN extension, and to pick up or transfer calls to that extension easily. The settings here control how SDN buttons operate for extensions at each COS level.
  • Page 420 Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—PDN/SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—COS Name Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension SDN Key Assignment by PT Program Selects whether PT users can create SDN buttons on their own extensions using PT programming.

  • Page 421: Door Unlock

    2.9 [2] System Optional Device & Other Extensions COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.1 Class of Service (COS) Door Unlock Enables using the door opener feature.
  • Page 422 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Accept the Call from DISA Enables reception of calls from DISA. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—COS 2.12.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Feature Guide References...
  • Page 423 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—COS Feature Guide References 1.25.5 Wireless XDP Parallel Mode Miscellaneous COS Name Specifies the name of the COS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 424 2.9 [2] System Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 425: 2-7-2] Class Of Service-External Call Block

    2.9.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block Each COS can have different trunk groups available for making trunk calls, depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). Select the desired time mode from the list. Outgoing Trunk Group 1–64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies the available trunk groups.

  • Page 426: 2-7-3] Class Of Service-Internal Call Block

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Internal Call Block determines the restrictions placed on making intercom calls. The extensions, incoming call distribution groups, and doorphones belonging to a certain COS can be programmed to not receive intercom calls from those belonging to a certain COS. COS Number of the Extension Which Receive the Call from Other Extension 1–64 Specifies the combinations of COS levels for which intercom calls are blocked.

  • Page 427: 2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Co

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming trunk calls depending on the trunk group that the calls are received on. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 428: 2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Doorphone

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming doorphone calls depending on the doorphone port that the calls originate from. A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.

  • Page 429: 2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns-Call From Others

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Different ring tone patterns can be selected for incoming intercom calls and ringing triggered by certain PBX features (Timed Reminder, Call Back, and Live Call Screening). A maximum of 8 Ring Tone Pattern Tables can be programmed, and any pattern table can be selected for use by an extension.
  • Page 430 2.9 [2] System Value Range Single, Double, Triple, S-Double, Option 1, Option 2 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—Ring Pattern Table Feature Guide References None Live Call Screening—Ring Tone Pattern Plan 1–8...

  • Page 431: 2-9] System Options

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Various system settings can be programmed. Option 1 PT LCD—Date Display Selects the order that the month and date are shown on the displays of extensions. Value Range Date-Month, Month-Date Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 432 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) PT Fwd / DND—Fwd LED Selects the light pattern of the FWD/DND button while the FWD feature is activated. Value Range On (Solid): Red on Flash: Slow red flashing...
  • Page 433 2.9 [2] System PT Fwd / DND—Fwd/DND key mode when Idle Selects the function of the FWD/DND button (fixed button) when it is pressed in idle status. (A FWD/ DND button customised on a flexible button is always in FWD/DND Cycle Switch mode, and the mode cannot be changed.) Value Range FWD/DND Setting Mode: Enter programming mode for the FWD/DND setting.
  • Page 434 2.9 [2] System Enable: The PT user's voice is sent through the handset microphone. The other party's voice is heard through both the hands-free speaker and the handset. Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.11.2 Off-hook Monitor PT Operation—Privacy Release by SCO key Selects the function of the S-CO button during a trunk call.
  • Page 435 2.9 [2] System PT Operation—PT Ring Off Setting Specifies whether incoming call ringing can be turned off at individual extensions. If disabled, users cannot prevent incoming calls from ringing. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 436 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.13.1 Call Hold PT Operation—Hold Key Mode Selects which extensions can retrieve a held call or a call that is transferred by Call Transfer without Announcement feature. Value Range Hold: Any extension can retrieve a held call. Exclusive Hold: Only the holding extension can retrieve a held call.
  • Page 437 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CODEC—Network CODEC (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Selects the CODEC type for ISDN or T1/E1 lines. Value Range A-Law, µ-Law Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 438 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—ISDN Outgoing Call Type 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—ISDN Outgoing Call Type Feature Guide References 1.21.1.1 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)—SUMMARY Redial—Automatic Redial when No Answer (ISDN)
  • Page 439 2.9 [2] System Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Automatic Redial—Redial Call Ring Duration Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial Redial—Save Dial After Connection to Redial Memory Specifies whether any digits dialled after the called party answers (for example, to access a specific extension within another company) are also saved as part of the redial number.
  • Page 440 2.9 [2] System Extension - CO Call Limitation—For Incoming Call Selects whether the time limit for extension-to-trunk calls applies to outgoing calls only or for both outgoing and incoming calls. COS determines the use of this feature, and the length of the time limit can be assigned on a trunk group basis.
  • Page 441 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 2. Confirmation Tone 2 is heard from a PT when it receives a call in Hands-free Answerback mode, or paging.
  • Page 442 2.9 [2] System Confirmation Tone—Tone 3-2 : Start Talking after answering call Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 3-2. Confirmation Tone 3-2 is heard from an extension when answering a call by, for example, the Call Pickup feature. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options...
  • Page 443 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.14.1.2 Conference 1.29.2 Confirmation Tone Confirmation Tone—Tone 5 : Hold Enables the PBX to send Confirmation Tone 5. Confirmation Tone 5 is heard from an extension when it holds a call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References...
  • Page 444 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) 2.15.1 [8-1] System Setting Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) 1.29.1 Dial Tone Echo Cancel—Conference...
  • Page 445 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Echo Cancel—Extension to Analogue Line Enables the use of the ECHO/EECHO card for extension-to-analogue trunk calls. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 446 2.9 [2] System Value Range ON or Flash, OFF Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 1.20.3 LED Indication DSS Key—Call Pick-up by DSS key for Direct Incoming Call Specifies whether a DSS button will light up or flash when a call rings at the specified extension. To enable this setting, DSS Key—DSS Key mode for Incoming Call on this screen must be set to ON or Flash.
  • Page 447 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup DSS Key—Automatic Transfer for Extension Call Specifies whether pressing a DSS or SDN button during an extension-to-extension call disconnects the current call or places the call on consultation hold. Value Range Disable: The PBX disconnects the current call, and calls the extension assigned to the DSS or SDN button.
  • Page 448 2.9 [2] System Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback Send CLIP of CO Caller to ISDN—when Transfer (CLIP of Held Party) Enables the transfer of related CLIP information when a party on hold is transferred. When set to "Enable", the transfer destination will receive the original caller's CLIP information, not the information of the extension that performed the transfer.
  • Page 449 2.9 [2] System Private Network—Public Call through Private Network—Minimum Public Caller ID Digits Specifies the minimum length of Caller ID required for a call from a private network to be considered as a call from a public network. Value Range 0–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options...
  • Page 450 Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Option 5 SLT—SLT Hold Mode Selects how to hold a line and transfer a call with an SLT.
  • Page 451 2.9 [2] System SLT—Message Waiting Lamp Pattern (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the Message Waiting Lamp light pattern of SLTs. Value Range 1–12 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.19.1 Message Waiting Whisper OHCA—for SLT / APT / KX-T72xx Enables the use of Whisper OHCA to SLTs and IP-PTs, and DPTs other than KX-T7400 series, KX- T7500 series, or KX-T7600 series.
  • Page 452 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.1.3.3 Call Waiting Busy Out—Busy Out for Analogue CO Enables the PBX to automatically set a trunk to Busy Out status when a loop current is not detected, preventing that trunk from being used. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 453 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None ISDN Option—Fwd from ISDN to ISDN Specifies whether alert messages are sent to the ISDN network. This setting should be enabled for networks that disconnect a call if an alert message is not received. Value Range Mode1: Disable Mode2: Enable...
  • Page 454 2.9 [2] System Value Range 0–10 Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) 1st Party CTI—CDR retry interval timer Specifies the length of time until the alive check of CDR (Call Detail Recording) is retried when no response is received, for First Party Call Control CTI.
  • Page 455 2.9 [2] System 3rd Party CTI—System status retry counter Specifies the number of times that the alive check is repeated for Third Party Call Control CTI. When the alive check has been attempted the programmed number of times without success, the PBX assumes that the logical connection with the CTI application software has been lost.
  • Page 456 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References 1.32.1 Computer Telephony Integration (CTI) CTI Multi PBX Control—PBX Name Specifies the name of the PBX, for network programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 457 2.9 [2] System Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 458: 2-10] Extension Cid Settings

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Various settings for extension Caller ID can be programmed. Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only) Specifies a group of 4 SLT ports that can transfer Caller ID information to connected SLTs. When the port to which an extension is connected has this feature activated, there will be a short delay before the extension rings for incoming calls.
  • Page 459 2.9.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Caller ID Signal Type (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the type of signal modulation to be used when sending Caller ID information to an SLT (reference only). PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 460 2.9 [2] System Value Range Maintenance Console Location 2.9.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID Additional Local Trunk Access Code to Extension Caller ID Enables the PBX to automatically add a Trunk Access number to the received telephone number when sending the Caller ID number of an incoming trunk call to an SLT.
  • Page 461 2.9 [2] System Send Caller ID Name to Extension Enables the PBX to send the caller's name when sending Caller ID information to an SLT. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.9.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...

  • Page 462: 2-11-1] Audio Gain-Paging/Moh

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Gain levels for the External Pager/External BGM ports can be programmed. Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the paging volume for External Pager port 1. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.9.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH...
  • Page 463 2.9.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References 2.10.10 [3-4] Paging Group Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging MOH—MOH 1 (Music On Hold 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the music volume for External BGM port 1. Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.9.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH...
  • Page 464 2.9 [2] System Programming Manual References 2.9.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM Feature Guide References 1.13.4 Music on Hold 1.17.4 Background Music (BGM) MOH—MOH (Music On Hold) (KX-TDA30 only) Specifies the music volume for the External BGM. Value Range -11–11 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.9.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH Programming Manual References...

  • Page 465: 2-11-2] Audio Gain-Card

    2.9 [2] System 2.9.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Gain levels can be programmed for each type of card. Up Gain (To PBX) Specifies the volume for audio signals from the selected type of card to the PBX. Value Range -15–15 dB Maintenance Console Location 2.9.20 [2-11-2] Audio Gain—Card Programming Manual References...

  • Page 466: 3] Group

    2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Trunks can be organised into trunk groups. The settings of each trunk group determine the settings of the trunks within that group. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups can be programmed.

  • Page 467: Line Hunting Order

    2.10 [3] Group Line Hunting Order Specifies the trunk hunting sequence for the trunk group. The hunting sequence can be programmed to start from the lowest or highest numbered trunks, or to rotate uniformly among all trunks. Value Range High -> Low, Low -> High, Rotation Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 468 2.10 [3] Group Feature Guide References 1.11.8 Trunk Call Limitation Caller-ID Modification Table Specifies the table to be used for modifying caller information (telephone number). Value Range 1–4 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 2.10.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...
  • Page 469 2.10 [3] Group Programming Manual References 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None DISA Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of a DISA-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...
  • Page 470 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References 1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Simplified Voice Message Tone Detection—Silence Enables the disconnection of an SVM-originated trunk-to-trunk call by silence detection. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 471: Host Pbx Access Code

    2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Host PBX Access Code Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max.
  • Page 472 2.10 [3] Group Collect Call Reject (For Brazil) Group Name Specifies the name of the trunk group for programming reference. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Mode...
  • Page 473 2.10 [3] Group Feature Guide References None Collect Call Reject (for Brazil)—Flashing Time Selects the length of the flash signal that the PBX sends to reject a collect call. This setting is only for users in Brazil. Value Range 1000 ms, 1500 ms, 2000 ms, 2500 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.10.1 [3-1-1] Trunk Group—TRG Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 474: 3-1-2] Trunk Group-Local Access Priority

    Trunk Group No. & Name Specifies the trunk group assigned to the corresponding priority level. Select the blank option to not assign a trunk group to the priority. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Trunk Group No. 1–64 For KX-TDA600: Trunk Group No. 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority...

  • Page 475: 3-1-3] Caller Id Modification

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification The telephone numbers of incoming callers can be modified automatically by a Caller ID Modification Table, and then recorded for calling back. Caller ID Modification The PBX looks for incoming telephone numbers that begin with an area code programmed in the Caller ID Modification Table assigned to that trunk group.
  • Page 476 2.10.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...
  • Page 477 2.10.3 [3-1-3] Caller ID Modification Programming Manual References 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Calling Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—Called Party number—Type of Number—Public, Private Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID...

  • Page 478: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan The PBX sends all of the dialled digits at once after an extension user completes dialling. The PBX can recognise the end of dialling when the dialled telephone number starts with the programmed leading number and contains the programmed total number of digits.
  • Page 479 2.10 [3] Group Added Number Specifies the number to be added to the dialled number in place of the removed digits. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 2.10.4 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 480: 3-1-4] Dialling Plan-Auto Assign

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.5 [3-1-4] Dialling Plan—Auto Assign It is possible to assign a set of leading numbers automatically. Select Auto Assigning Table Selects the set of preset leading number values to assign to the active dialling plan table. When Type D is selected, you will be prompted to enter a 3-digit area code, and 7 "X"s, in cells 1 through 47 of the dialling plan table.

  • Page 481: 3-1-5] Trunk Group-Charge Rate

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.6 [3-1-5] Trunk Group—Charge Rate The rate charged per pay tone signal (sent from the telephone company) can be assigned for each trunk group. Trunk Group Name Indicates the name of the trunk group (reference only). Value Range Max.

  • Page 482: 3-2] User Group

    2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Main—User Group Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group Tenant Number Specifies the tenant to which the extension user group belongs. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.7 [3-2] User Group Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...

  • Page 483: 3-3] Call Pickup Group

    8 call pickup groups. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/ KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) call pickup groups can be programmed. To assign extension user groups to call pickup groups easily, click All Setting.

  • Page 484: 3-3] Call Pickup Group-All Setting

    2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding pickup group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 2.10.9 [3-3] Call Pickup Group—All Setting...

  • Page 485: 3-4] Paging Group

    Extensions can be assigned to a paging group according to their extension user groups. External pagers can also be assigned to a paging group. One extension user group or external pager can belong to multiple paging groups. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) paging groups can be programmed.
  • Page 486 2.10 [3] Group 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 487: 3-4] Paging Group-All Setting

    2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group User Group 1–32 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1–96 (KX-TDA600) Specifies whether the extension user group belongs to the corresponding paging group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF Maintenance Console Location 2.10.11 [3-4] Paging Group—All Setting...

  • Page 488: 3-4] Paging Group-External

    2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group External Pager 2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies whether the external pager belongs to the corresponding paging group. Value Range ON (blue), OFF PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 489 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.12 [3-4] Paging Group—External Pager Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.15.1 Paging 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 490: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Group Settings

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Extensions can be assigned as members of an incoming call distribution group. Calls to an incoming call distribution group are distributed to its member extensions as programmed. A maximum of 128 incoming call distribution groups can be programmed.
  • Page 491 2.10 [3] Group Value Range Ring, UCD, Priority Hunting Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Call Waiting Distribution Selects the call waiting distribution method for busy extensions of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range All, Distribution Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 492 Specifies the tenant to which the incoming call distribution group belongs, to determine the Time Table and the audio source for the group. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...

  • Page 493: Overflow Queuing Busy

    2.10 [3] Group Value Range 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings 2.9.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block 2.9.13 [2-7-3] Class of Service—Internal Call Block Feature Guide References 1.1.2.2 Internal Call Block CLIP on ICD Group Button Specifies the CLIP number sent to the network when making calls using the ICD Group button.
  • Page 494 2.10 [3] Group Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Queuing Busy—Destination-Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the overflow destination of calls that cannot be queued in each time mode.

  • Page 495: Overflow No Answer

    2.10 [3] Group Overflow No Answer Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...

  • Page 496: Queuing Time Table

    2.10 [3] Group Programming Manual References 2.9.5 [2-4] Week Table Feature Guide References 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature 1.2.2.6 Overflow Feature Time out & Manual Queue Redirection—Overflow Time Specifies the length of time calls wait in a queue before they are redirected to the overflow destination. Value Range None, 10 ×...
  • Page 497 Feature Guide References None Queuing Time Table—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Queuing Time Table to be used in each time mode. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, Table 1–Table 64 For KX-TDA600: None, Table 1–Table 128 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.5 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 498 2.10 [3] Group Queuing Time Table When Extension Ringing Enables the PBX to play messages/BGM to the caller according to the Queuing Time Table, when the call arrives at an extension without being queued or after being queued. Value Range Disable (Ringback Tone), Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings...

  • Page 499: Extension No Answer Redirection Time

    2.10 [3] Group Feature Guide References None Extension No Answer Redirection Time Specifies the length of time that a call queues at an extension before it is redirected to the next member extension of the incoming call distribution group, in UCD or Priority Hunting distribution method.
  • Page 500 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Last Extension Log-out Specifies whether the last extension logged-in to the incoming call distribution group is allowed to log out.
  • Page 501 2.10 [3] Group Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature Programmed Mailbox No. Specifies the mailbox number of the incoming call distribution group's mailbox for Voice Processing Systems (VPS) with DTMF Integration.
  • Page 502 2.10 [3] Group Group Name Specifies the name of the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Incoming Call Log Memory Specifies the number of unanswered calls to the incoming call distribution group that can be logged in the call log memory.
  • Page 503 2.10 [3] Group Group FWD Call from CO—Destination Specifies the forward destination of incoming trunk calls directed to the incoming call distribution group. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, [ ] [Secret], and P [Pause]) Maintenance Console Location 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 504 2.10 [3] Group Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 505: 3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Member List

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List Each incoming call distribution group can have a maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) members (extensions) assigned to it, and each member can have its own delayed ringing and Wrap-up time settings. An extension can be a member of multiple incoming call distribution groups.

  • Page 506: Delayed Ring

    2.10 [3] Group Delayed Ring Specifies the delayed ringing setting of each member. (Applicable when the call distribution method of the incoming call distribution group is set to Ring.) Value Range Immediate, 1–6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 507: 3-5-2] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Queuing Time Table

    Table A Queuing Time Table can contain up to 16 sequences which control how calls waiting in a queue are handled. A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX- TDA600) Queuing Time Tables can be programmed.

  • Page 508: 3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group-Miscellaneous

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Optional settings related to Incoming Call Distribution Groups can be programmed. Options—Call Log to ICD Group for Answered Call Selects whether answered calls to an ICD Group are also logged in the Incoming Call Log for the group, in addition to the log of the extension that answered the call.
  • Page 509 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.16 [3-5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Options—Wrap-up Timer based on Selects whether the ICD Group member wrap-up timer or extension wrap-up timer is used. If Extension is selected here, Wrap-up Timer on 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List becomes unavailable.

  • Page 510: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group

    If there is no idle extension in the group, the call can then be redirected to the overflow destination, which can be different depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 128 (with the KX-TDA600) hunting groups can be programmed, each containing up to 16 extensions.
  • Page 511 2.10 [3] Group Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 2.10.17 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.2.1 Idle Extension Hunting PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 512: 3-6] Extension Hunting Group-Member List

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.18 [3-6] Extension Hunting Group—Member List Each hunting group can contain up to 16 extensions. Select the hunting group to programme from the Hunting Group No. list. To assign members to the group, enter the extension numbers in Extension Number or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

  • Page 513: 3-7-1] Vm(Dpt) Group-System Settings

    PBX. The DPT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DPT) Group. With the KX-TDA30, a maximum of 1 VM (DPT) Group can be programmed; with the KX-TDA100/ KX-TDA200, 2 VM (DPT) Groups can be programmed; and with the KX-TDA600, 8 VM (DPT) groups can be programmed.
  • Page 514 2.10 [3] Group Transfer Recall to Mailbox Enables the PBX to send the mailbox number of the transfer destination extension to the VPS in these situations: (1) when a call is transferred to an extension by the Call Transfer without Announcement feature using the Automated Attendant (AA) service of the VPS, and the call is not answered within a programmed time period;...

  • Page 515: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings A VM (DPT) group has a floating extension number, which can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign extension numbers to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.

  • Page 516: 3-7-2] Vm(Dpt) Group-Unit Settings-Member List

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Displays information on the settings of all relevant ports. Only ports set to VM(DPT) in DPT Type— Type of 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port will be displayed. In addition, the other information displayed here can also be set in 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
  • Page 517 2.10 [3] Group For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1, 2 For KX-TDA600: 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.10.21 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings—Member List Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 2.10.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group VM Port No.
  • Page 518 2.10 [3] Group Programming Manual References DPT Type—Type 2.10.20 [3-7-2] VM(DPT) Group—Unit Settings 2.10.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Feature Guide References 1.24.1 Voice Mail (VM) Group 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max.

  • Page 519: 3-8-1] Vm(Dtmf) Group-System Settings

    2.10.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings A Panasonic Voice Processing System (VPS) with DTMF Integration can be connected to SLT ports of the PBX. The SLT ports that are connected to the VPS are called a VM (DTMF) Group. A maximum of 2 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 8 (with the KX-TDA600) VM (DTMF) Groups can be programmed.
  • Page 520 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—DND tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the called extension is in DND mode.
  • Page 521 2.10 [3] Group Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, and P [pause]) Maintenance Console Location 2.10.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Status Signal—Disconnect Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the caller hangs up. Value Range Max.
  • Page 522 2.10 [3] Group VM DTMF Status Signal—FWD to VM Busy Tone Specifies the DTMF status signal the PBX sends to the VPS when the call has been forwarded to the VPS and all ports of the VPS are busy. Value Range Max.
  • Page 523 2.10 [3] Group Feature Guide References None VM DTMF Command—Listening Message Specifies the DTMF command the PBX sends to the VPS when an extension user answers a message waiting notification from the VPS, so that the extension user can retrieve a new message in a certain mailbox without having to dial the mailbox number manually.
  • Page 524 2.10 [3] Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing—DTMF Length for VM Specifies the length of DTMF signals the PBX sends to the VPS. Value Range 80 ms, 160 ms Maintenance Console Location 2.10.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 525 2.10 [3] Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Timing—Waiting Time before Sending VM DTMF Status Signal Specifies the length of time that the PBX waits before sending the DTMF status signal to the VPS after the VPS has finished dialling. Value Range 0.5 s, 1.0 s, 1.5 s, 2.0 s Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 526 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Others—Intercept Routing to the VPS Sequence Specifies which DTMF commands the VPS receives from the PBX when a call is intercepted to the VPS, so that the VPS can answer the call either with a mailbox or in the AA service mode.
  • Page 527 2.10 [3] Group Others—Message Waiting Lamp Control Specifies whether the PBX or VPS cancels the Message Waiting feature (e.g., turning off the MESSAGE button light) when an extension user answers the message waiting notification from the VPS. Value Range By PBX, By VM Maintenance Console Location 2.10.22 [3-8-1] VM(DTMF) Group—System Settings Programming Manual References...

  • Page 528: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings A VM (DTMF) group has a floating extension number, and can be assigned as the destination for redirected calls and incoming calls. To assign members to the group, click Member List. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View.
  • Page 529 2.10 [3] Group Maintenance Console Location 2.10.23 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 530: 3-8-2] Vm(Dtmf) Group-Group Settings-Member List

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.24 [3-8-2] VM(DTMF) Group—Group Settings—Member List Select the group to programme from the VM(DTMF) Group Number list. To assign members to the group, enter directly or click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). To copy members to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group, and click OK.

  • Page 531: 3-9] Ps Ring Group

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group A PS ring group is a group of PS extensions that receives incoming calls. Each group has a floating extension number and name. One PS can belong to multiple PS ring groups. A maximum of 32 PS ring groups can be programmed, each containing up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions.
  • Page 532 2.10 [3] Group Value Range Caller ID, Called Number Maintenance Console Location 2.10.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.25.2 PS Ring Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 533: 3-9] Ps Ring Group-Member List

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Each PS Ring Group can have up to 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PS extensions assigned. Select the group to programme from the PS Ring Group Number list.

  • Page 534: 3-10] Broadcasting Group

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.27 [3-10] Broadcasting Group A broadcasting group is a group of telephones (extensions or outside destinations) that ring when a broadcasting call is made. One destination number can be assigned to multiple broadcasting groups. Up to 31 members can be assigned to each of 8 broadcasting groups. To assign members to a group, click Member List.

  • Page 535: 3-10] Broadcasting Group-Member List

    2.10 [3] Group 2.10.28 [3-10] Broadcasting Group—Member List Up to 31 members can be assigned to each broadcasting group. Select the group to programme from the Broadcasting Group Number list. To copy the numbers to another group, click Member List Copy, select the group to copy to, and click Dial Number Specifies the destination number of each member of the broadcasting group.

  • Page 536: 4] Extension

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings For each slot in which an extension card is installed, a certain number of extension ports are displayed. For each extension port, various extension settings can be assigned. To assign a set of CLIP numbers automatically, click CLIP Generate. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table.
  • Page 537 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
  • Page 538 S-Hybrid(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of Super Hybrid port (DHLC) DPT(S-DPT): Digital XDP port of DPT port (DLC) ISDN: ISDN port (BRI) IP-EXT: IP-Extension port (IP-EXT) For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only: ISDN: ISDN port (PRI) OPX: T1-OPX port (T1) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 539 None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the extension belongs. Extension user groups are used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–32 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 540 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.
  • Page 541 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 542 2.11 [4] Extension Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND.
  • Page 543 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing Intercept No Answer Time Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
  • Page 544 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
  • Page 545 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range 0–240 s Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)— Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Shelf (KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 546 2.11 [4] Extension Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
  • Page 547 Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab. CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).
  • Page 548 2.11 [4] Extension CLIR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number on the called party's telephone when making a public network trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
  • Page 549 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 550 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 551 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 2.9.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 2.9.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References 1.1.3.2 Ring Tone Pattern Selection Programmed Mailbox No.
  • Page 552 2.11 [4] Extension ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying calls made from the extension for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.15.6 [8-5] Carrier...
  • Page 553 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension.
  • Page 554 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker OHCA: Voice from the built-in speaker W-OHCA: Voice from the handset...
  • Page 555 2.11 [4] Extension Pickup Dial Set Sets or cancels the Hot Line feature. The number specified in Pickup Dial No. on this screen is dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 556 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.11.5 Data Line Security Option 3 Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only).
  • Page 557 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS".
  • Page 558 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your extension Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.3 Call Pickup...
  • Page 559 2.11 [4] Extension Charge Limit Specifies the maximum limit of call charges allowed for the extension. When this limit is reached, the extension cannot be used to make further trunk calls. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 560 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port...
  • Page 561 F-1–F-36: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is seized. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected. For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
  • Page 562 No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-36: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-36) is selected. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
  • Page 563 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Stop Record, Keep Record Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration LCS Answer Mode Specifies whether the extension's mailbox is monitored in Hands-free or Private mode. Value Range Hands free: Monitor through the built-in speaker Private: Monitor through the handset or the built-in speaker after hearing a warning tone...
  • Page 564 2.11 [4] Extension Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 565 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References 2.8.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 566 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Automatic LCD Switch when Start Talking Enables the first line of the display to show the call duration automatically after answering a trunk call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 567 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.4.1.4 Hands-free Answerback Option 6 Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 568 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply.
  • Page 569 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Forced Automatic Answer Specifies whether the extension automatically answers all incoming calls (both intercom and trunk calls) without going off-hook, regardless of the Hands-free Answerback setting. Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...

  • Page 570: Paging Deny

    2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Display Lock / SVM Lock Locks or unlocks the Incoming Call Log and Simplified Voice Message Log display (i.e., specifies whether other extension users can see the Incoming Call Log and SVM Log information at the extension).
  • Page 571 2.11 [4] Extension Option 7 Shelf (KX-TDA600 only) Indicates the shelf position (reference only). Value Range Shelf number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 572 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Extension Number Specifies the extension number of the extension. To change the extension number of a wired extension, follow the steps below: Type the new extension number, then click Apply. Set the status of the extension port to "OUS", then "INS". When changing the extension number, make sure that the extension port is not in use.
  • Page 573 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Flash Mode during CO Conversation Selects the function of the FLASH/RECALL button during a trunk conversation. Value Range EFA, Terminate, Flash Recall Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 574 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.4 Last Number Redial ISDN Bearer Selects the ISDN bearer mode. When Automatic is selected, the bearer mode is set automatically depending on the extension's telephone type as follows: PT: Speech SLT: Audio...
  • Page 575 2.11 [4] Extension Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 576 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References 2.8.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 577 2.9.18 [2-10] Extension CID Settings—Extension Caller ID Resource-1, 2 (KX-TDA30 only) Feature Guide References 1.18.1 Caller ID SLT MW Mode (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Enables the use of the Message Waiting Lamp on an SLT extension connected to the extension port. Value Range...
  • Page 578 2.11 [4] Extension Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before an extension will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 2.10.16 [3- 5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
  • Page 579 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port Feature Guide References None Extension Number...
  • Page 580 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings...
  • Page 581 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each extension card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 582 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.6 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—Connection Command Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the extension. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 583 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD Mode for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding type of incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 584 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) DND Set for Call from Extension Indicates the current DND status for incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 585 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD No Answer Time Indicates the length of time that an incoming call rings at the extension before the call is forwarded (reference only).

  • Page 586: 4-1-1] Wired Extension-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 587 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.2 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.

  • Page 588: 4-1-2] Wired Extension-Fwd/Dnd

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND For each extension, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Call from CO—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
  • Page 589 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from CO—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References...
  • Page 590 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls. Value Range OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
  • Page 591 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Call from Extension—FWD Destination Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls. Value Range Max.

  • Page 592: 4-1-3] Wired Extension-Speed Dial

    Personal Speed Dialling allows extension users to dial frequently dialled numbers using two-digit speed dialling numbers (00–99). A maximum of 10 Personal Speed Dialling numbers can be programmed for each extension, or 100 when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list.

  • Page 593: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button

    Hurry-up, Wrap-up, System Alarm, Time Service, Answer, Release, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Headset, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Check In, Check Out, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 594 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–64 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 595 2.11 [4] Extension Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies which incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to are logged in to or logged out from. Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the extension belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 596 None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button...
  • Page 597 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 598 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group FWD (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.
  • Page 599 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Log-in/Log-out) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to log-in to or log-out from.
  • Page 600 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the floating extension number of the VM (DPT) group containing the desired mailbox.
  • Page 601 2.11 [4] Extension Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to this SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
  • Page 602 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol Dial (for NDSS) Specifies the network extension number of the extension to be accessed using Network Direct Station Selection. Note that only extension numbers that have been previously registered in 2.16.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table can be specified here.
  • Page 603 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Call Park) Specifies the number of the parking zone a call is to be parked in when a Call Park button with Parameter Selection (for Call Park) on this screen set to Specific is pressed.
  • Page 604 Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 605 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 606 2.11 [4] Extension Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN)
  • Page 607 2.11 [4] Extension Color of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour. Value Range Any colour Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Color of Background...
  • Page 608 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Telephone Type Telephone Type Selects the type of telephone for which you want to print a key label template. Value Range T7633/T7636, T7625/T7630/NT136, T7665/NT265, T7667/APT, Other Maintenance Console Location 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...

  • Page 609: 4-1-4] Wired Extension-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.6 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings (including key label settings) of an extension can be copied to different extensions. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the extension that will receive the copied settings. Multiple extensions can be selected.

  • Page 610: 4-1-5] Wired Extension-Pf Button

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.7 [4-1-5] Wired Extension—PF Button Each Programmable Feature (PF) button can be customised to access a certain feature with one touch. A maximum of 12 PF buttons can be customised for each extension. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Type Specifies whether to store a dialling number for the one-touch access.

  • Page 611: 4-1-6] Wired Extension-Ndss Link Data - Send

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.8 [4-1-6] Wired Extension—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension's status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 612: 4-1-7] Wired Extension-Simplified Voice Message

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message When an SVM/ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each extension. This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
  • Page 613 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station Feature Guide References None Extension Name Indicates the name of the extension (reference only). Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Main—Extension Name...
  • Page 614 2.11 [4] Extension Maximum SVM Log Specifies the maximum number of voice messages (not including greeting messages) that can be stored for the extension. Value Range 1–100 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 615: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings

    2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings For each Portable Station (PS), various extension settings can be assigned. A maximum of 28 (with the KX-TDA30), 128 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 512 (with the KX-TDA600) PSs can be programmed. To assign names and tenants to extension user groups, click Extension User Group Table. See 2.10.7 [3-2] User Group for more details.
  • Page 616 None User Group Specifies the extension user group to which the PS belongs. The extension user group is used to compose tenants, call pickup groups and paging groups. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–32 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 617 2.11 [4] Extension Extension PIN Specifies the PIN of the PS. Value Range Max. 10 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.28.1 Extension Personal Identification Number (PIN) WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or...
  • Page 618 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name Feature Guide References None Intercept Destination—When called party does not answer—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the Intercept Routing destination of calls in each time mode for Intercept Routing–No Answer and Intercept Routing–DND.
  • Page 619 2.11 [4] Extension Intercept No Answer Time Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name...
  • Page 620 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)— Day, Lunch, Break, Night Feature Guide References 1.1.1.6 Intercept Routing ISDN CLIP Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max.
  • Page 621 Extension: Show the CLIP number specified in CLIP ID on the Option 1 tab. CO: Show the CLIP number specified in Subscriber Number in 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port or 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only).
  • Page 622 2.11 [4] Extension COLR Specifies whether to restrict the display of the CLIP number of the PS on the caller's telephone display when answering a call. Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP)
  • Page 623 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Ring Pattern Table Specifies the Ring Tone Pattern Table to be used by the PS. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.14 [2-8-1] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from CO 2.9.15 [2-8-2] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Doorphone 2.9.16 [2-8-3] Ring Tone Patterns—Call from Others Feature Guide References...
  • Page 624 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.12.1 Call Transfer ARS Itemised Code Specifies the itemised billing code used by the ARS feature for identifying the calls made from the PS for accounting and billing purposes. Value Range Max.
  • Page 625 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name Feature Guide References None Manual C. Waiting for Extension Call Selects the method of receiving call waiting notification from other extensions. Value Range Off: No notification BSS: Tone from the handset or built-in speaker...
  • Page 626 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start Feature Guide References 1.6.1.7 Hot Line Pickup Dial No. Specifies the number to be dialled automatically after going off-hook when the Hot Line feature is active.
  • Page 627 2.11 [4] Extension Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name Feature Guide References None Call Pickup Deny Specifies whether calls can be picked up by other extensions. Value Range Disable: Allows other extension users to pick up calls to your PS Enable: Prevents other extension users from picking up calls to your PS...
  • Page 628 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.8.2 Executive Busy Override Absent Message Specifies the Personal Absent Message which, unlike the System Absent Message, can be customised for each PS. Value Range Max. 16 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 629 F-1–F-12: A trunk programmed for a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is seized. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected. For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: No Line: No line is seized. Idle: An idle trunk is seized automatically from the programmed trunk groups.
  • Page 630 No Line: No line is selected. Select a line by pressing the desired Line Access button to answer a call. Ringing Line: The longest ringing call is selected. PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only): The call arriving at any PDN button is selected. F-1–F-12: The call arriving at a flexible button (F-1–F-12) is selected. A flexible button customised as a Single-CO, Group-CO, Loop-CO, or ICD Group button must be selected.
  • Page 631 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Option 5 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References...
  • Page 632 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Language1–Language5 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.20.4 Display Information Incoming Call Display Selects which caller information is shown on the first line of the PS's display. Value Range Caller ID Name, CO Line Name, DDI/DID Name Maintenance Console Location...

  • Page 633: Svm Lock

    2.11 [4] Extension Option 6 Extension Number Indicates the extension number of the PS (reference only). Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name...
  • Page 634 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Flexible Button Programming Mode Specifies whether the PS user can modify all flexible buttons without limitation, or only the One-touch Dialling buttons. When the mode is set to One-touch Dial, there is no need to enter "2" before the number when customising a One-touch Dialling button.
  • Page 635 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name Feature Guide References None Character Input Mode Selects the character table to be used for entering characters. Value Range Table 1: Standard mode Table 2: Option mode Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 636 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.18.2 Incoming Call Log Outgoing Call Log Memory Specifies the number of telephone numbers dialled by the PS that are retained in the PS's Outgoing Call Log memory.
  • Page 637 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 4 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension No. Feature Guide References None Extension Name Specifies the name of the PS. Value Range Max.
  • Page 638 2.11 [4] Extension Wrap-up Timer Specifies the length of time that must pass after completing a call before a PS will accept another call when logged in as a member of an Incoming Call Distribution Group. This timer is used when "Options—Wrap-up Timer based on" is set to "Extension" in 2.10.16 [3- 5-3] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Miscellaneous.
  • Page 639 Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name Feature Guide References None PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls to a PDN extension (an extension with one or more PDN buttons). Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings...
  • Page 640 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Extension Name Feature Guide References None FWD Set for Call from CO Indicates the current FWD status for incoming trunk calls (reference only). Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 641 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) FWD Destination for Call from CO Indicates the forwarding destination of incoming trunk calls (reference only).
  • Page 642 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Off, On Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) FWD Mode for Call from Extension Indicates the forwarding type of incoming intercom calls (reference only). Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 643 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range 0–120 s Maintenance Console Location 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Programming Manual References 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 644: 4-2-1] Portable Station-Extension Settings-Clip Generate

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate CLIP Generate allows the CLIP numbers for a set of locations in series to be programmed together. Pre-assigned CLIP numbers for those locations will be overwritten. If a number generated here is longer than 16 digits, the additional digits will be discarded. Location Entry—Beginning Entry Location (Ext.
  • Page 645 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.11 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—CLIP Generate Programming Manual References 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings Feature Guide References 1.21.1.2 Calling/Connected Line Identification Presentation (CLIP/COLP) Parameter—Head of ID Specifies a prefix number to be applied to all generated CLIP numbers. Value Range Max.

  • Page 646: 4-2-2] Portable Station-Fwd / Dnd

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND For each PS, separate Call Forwarding (FWD) and Do Not Disturb (DND) settings can be programmed for incoming intercom and trunk calls. Select the desired PS from the Extension Number / Name list. Call from CO—Present Button Status Specifies the status of the FWD/DND—External button.
  • Page 647 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Call from CO—FWD Mode Specifies the circumstances when incoming trunk calls are forwarded. Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Programming Manual References...
  • Page 648 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.1 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND)—SUMMARY Call from Extension—FWD Status Availability Enables or disables the FWD feature for incoming intercom calls. Value Range OFF: Enables extensions to switch to FWD mode by pressing the FWD/DND button, if forward settings have been programmed.
  • Page 649 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range None, FWD All, FWD Busy, FWD N/A, FWD Busy N/A Maintenance Console Location 2.11.12 [4-2-2] Portable Station—FWD / DND Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3.1.2 Call Forwarding (FWD) Call from Extension—FWD Destination Specifies the forwarding destination of incoming intercom calls. Value Range Max.

  • Page 650: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button

    Group Fwd (Internal), Account, Conference, Terminate, EFA, Charge, Call Park, Log-in/Log-out, Hurry-up, Wrap-up, Time Service, TRS Level Change, ISDN Service, CLIR, COLR, ISDN Hold, Time Service - Automatic/Manual, Two-way Record, Two-way Transfer, LCS, Voice Mail Transfer, NDSS, CTI, PDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only), SDN (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 651 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Group CO) Specifies the trunk group to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–64 For KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 652 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range None: The incoming call distribution group is selected manually. All: All incoming call distribution groups that the PS belongs to. Incoming Group: A pre-specified incoming call distribution group Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 653 Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. The value specified here is only used when System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) on 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options is set to "Enable". Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 654 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for ICD Group) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 655 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (External)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which trunk calls are forwarded.
  • Page 656 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection).
  • Page 657 Feature Guide References 1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the floating extension number of the corresponding (owner) extension for the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
  • Page 658 2.11 [4] Extension Dial (for One-touch) Specifies the number to be dialled. The PBX can have a maximum of 500 (with the KX-TDA30/KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 1000 (with the KX-TDA600) One-touch Dialling buttons for PSs. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References...
  • Page 659 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Time Service) Specifies the Time Table to be used for changing time modes in the Automatic Switching mode. Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...
  • Page 660 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Display Option—Key Setting & Key Label Name Type This parameter is equivalent to Type on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button Programming Manual References 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Type Feature Guide References...
  • Page 661 Ext. No. (for Two-way Transfer) 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 662 2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Parameter 2 This parameter is equivalent to Optional Parameter (or Ringing Tone Type Number) on the Key Setting screen. Maintenance Console Location 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button...

  • Page 663: 4-2-3] Portable Station-Flexible Button-Flexible Button Data Copy

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.14 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Flexible button data copy The flexible button settings of a PS can be copied to different PSs. Destination Extension Line Select the number and name of the PS that will receive the copied settings. Multiple PSs can be selected.

  • Page 664: 4-2-4] Portable Station-Ndss Link Data - Send

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.15 [4-2-4] Portable Station—NDSS Link Data - Send It is possible to cancel the transmission of an extension's status data over the network. Select the desired extension from the Extension Number / Name list. Network BLF Data to NDSS Key of Other PBX - Other PBX (Network PBX ID=1) Selects whether extension status data is transmitted over the network for the selected extension.

  • Page 665: 4-2-5] Portable Station-Simplified Voice Message

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message When an SVM/ESVM card is installed in the PBX, Built-in Simplified Voice Message features can be provided for each PS. This screen allows you to specify which card each extension belongs to, and the maximum number of messages that can be stored for each extension.
  • Page 666 2.11 [4] Extension a number of extensions to each card, to ensure that the necessary resources, such as message recording space, are available for each extension. Value Range None, Card1(A), Card1(B), Card2(A), Card2(B) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.16 [4-2-5] Portable Station—Simplified Voice Message Programming Manual References 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot Feature Guide References...

  • Page 667: 4-3] Dss Console

    A DSS Console can be used in conjunction with a PT. A maximum of 4 (with the KX-TDA30), 8 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or 64 (with the KX-TDA600) DSS Consoles can be programmed. The DPT Type—Type of the extension port that DSS Console is connected must be set to DSS in 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port.
  • Page 668 2.11.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy Feature Guide References 1.20.2 Flexible Buttons Parameter Selection (for Single CO) Specifies the trunk to be accessed. Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–54 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–128 For KX-TDA600: 1–640 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access...
  • Page 669 2.11 [4] Extension Feature Guide References 1.5.5.3 Trunk Access Parameter Selection (for Call Park) Specifies whether a call is parked in an idle parking zone automatically or in a specific parking zone. Value Range Automatic, Specific Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 670 None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the delayed ringing setting for calls arriving at an SDN button. Value Range Immediate, 1 Ring, 2 Rings, 3 Rings, 4 Rings, 5 Rings, 6 Rings, No Ring Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console...
  • Page 671 2.11 [4] Extension Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.7.1 Primary Directory Number (PDN)/Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Extension Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for DSS) Specifies the number of an extension to be accessed. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 672 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Group Fwd (Both)) Specifies the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which both intercom and trunk calls are forwarded.
  • Page 673 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.3 Call Forwarding (FWD)/Do Not Disturb (DND) Features Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Call Log) Specifies the paired extension's number or the floating extension number of an incoming call distribution group for which call log information is displayed.
  • Page 674 2.11 [4] Extension Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) Specifies the floating extension number of the incoming call distribution group whose longest waiting call will be redirected (Manual Queue Redirection). Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 675 Feature Guide References 1.24.2 Voice Mail DTMF Integration 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Specifies the floating extension number of the PDN extension corresponding to the SDN button. Note that the extension specified here must have a PDN button registered for the SDN button to function.
  • Page 676 2.11 [4] Extension Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.2 One-touch Dialling Dial (for ISDN Service) Specifies the number required to access the telephone company's ISDN service. Value Range Max. 32 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, #, T [Transfer], [ ] [Secret], P [Pause], and F [Flash]) Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References...
  • Page 677 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.4 Time Service Optional Parameter (Ringing Tone Type Number) (for Loop CO, Single CO, Group CO, ICD Group, SDN) Specifies the ring tone type. Value Range KX-T7600 series (except KX-T7665)/IP-PT (except KX-NT265/KX-NT321): 1–30 KX-T7665/KX-NT265/KX-NT321: 1–8 (Even if ring tone 9–30 is selected, ring tone 1 is heard.)
  • Page 678 2.11 [4] Extension Ext No. of Mailbox (for Two-way Transfer) Specifies the number of the extension whose mailbox will be used to record conversations using One- touch Two-way Transfer. (For example, a secretary can record a conversation into the mailbox of a boss.) If the cell is left empty, the extension user must specify the number of an extension each time.
  • Page 679 Transfer) 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Voice Mail Transfer) 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None Dial This parameter is equivalent to Dial on the Key Setting screen.
  • Page 680 2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for Log-in/Log-out) 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for Time Service) 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for TRS Level Change) 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for Time Service - Automatic/Manual) 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Display Option—Key Setting—Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)
  • Page 681 2.11 [4] Extension Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Color of Font Specifies the colour used for the label text for the corresponding button. Click Choose to select a colour.
  • Page 682 2.11 [4] Extension Font Size Specifies the size of the font on the label for the corresponding button. Value Range 4–15 Maintenance Console Location 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None DSS Type DSS Type Selects the type of DSS Console for which you want to print a key label template.

  • Page 683: 4-3] Dss Console-Dss Key Data Copy

    2.11 [4] Extension 2.11.18 [4-3] DSS Console—DSS key data copy The flexible DSS button settings (including key label settings) of a DSS Console can be copied to different DSS Consoles. Select the DSS Console that has the setting to copy to other DSS Consoles from the DSS Console No./ Pair Extension list, then click Copy to.

  • Page 684: 5] Optional Device

    1.17.1 Doorphone Call Physical Location—Slot Indicates the slot to which the doorphone is connected (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call...
  • Page 685 2.12 [5] Optional Device Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call Name Specifies the doorphone name. Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 686 2.12 [5] Optional Device Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References 2.9.5 [2-4] Week Table Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call 2.2.3 Tenant Service Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number. COS programming determines the doorphone ports that are able to make trunk calls, and sets restrictions on intercom calls from certain extensions (Internal Call Block).
  • Page 687 2.12 [5] Optional Device Maintenance Console Location 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.1 Doorphone Call 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 688: 5-2] External

    2.12 [5] Optional Device 2.12.2 [5-2] External Pager Settings for external pagers (external speakers) can be specified. Click Extension List View to view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types (see 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View). Page Number 1, Page Number 2—Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number of the external pager.

  • Page 689: 5-3-1] Voice Message-Disa System

    2.12 [5] Optional Device 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Direct Inward System Access (DISA) enables outside callers to access specific PBX features as if the caller were using an SLT extension of the PBX. For more information on DISA, see "1.17.6 Direct Inward System Access (DISA)" in the Feature Guide.
  • Page 690 2.12 [5] Optional Device DISA Intercept—Intercept when Destination through DISA sets DND Selects how DISA calls are handled if the destination sets DND, and disables Idle Extension Hunting. Value Range Busy Tone, Enable, Busy Message Maintenance Console Location 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 691 2.12 [5] Optional Device CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO Specifies whether the DISA port of the message card is released when a trunk-to-public trunk call using DISA is established. To enable this setting, "CO-CO with DISA—Fwd/Transfer to Public CO" on this screen should be set to "Enable".
  • Page 692 2.12 [5] Optional Device Value Range Disable: Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established without using DISA. Enable (Get DISA): Trunk-to-public trunk calls are established using DISA, and DISA can be used to detect the end of the call. Maintenance Console Location 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System Programming Manual References 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1—CO-CO with DISA—DISA to Public CO...
  • Page 693 DISA trunk-to-trunk conversation established through an analogue trunk. To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range...
  • Page 694 Note that this option can only be set when DISA Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the MSG card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range 10 × n (n=11–400) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System...
  • Page 695 2.12 [5] Optional Device 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide References None DISA Cyclic Tone Option—Repeating Times of On/Off for Detection Specifies the number of times the tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) must be received to establish reception of the cyclic tone.
  • Page 696 2.12 [5] Optional Device To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the OPB3 card to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card. Middle: About 60 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.

  • Page 697: 5-3-2] Voice Message-Disa Message

    Outgoing messages (OGM) for DISA calls can be specified. A maximum of 32 (with the KX-TDA30) or 64 (with the KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600) OGMs can be programmed. To view a list of all programmed extension numbers and types, click Extension List View (see 2.5.7 Tool—Extension List View).
  • Page 698 Busy / DND Message No. Selects the OGM to be played for the caller when the destination party is busy or sets DND. Value Range For KX-TDA30: None, 1–32 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: None, 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 2.12.4 [5-3-2] Voice Message—DISA Message Programming Manual References 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System...
  • Page 699 2.12 [5] Optional Device 1.17.7 Automatic Fax Transfer PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 700: 5-3-3] Voice Message-Svm

    2.12 [5] Optional Device 2.12.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Settings related to the SVM/ESVM cards can be specified, for use with the Simplified Voice Message feature. SVM Card No. 1, 2—Slot No. Indicates the slot position (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.12.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM Programming Manual References...

  • Page 701: Remote Access

    2.12 [5] Optional Device Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.8 Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM) Recording Mode Specifies the sound quality of messages recorded on the SVM/ESVM card. Increasing the recording quality reduces the total length of recording time available on the card. Value Range Low: About 120 minutes of messages can be recorded per card.
  • Page 702 To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the SVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range Fixed: The number of times of a tone pattern (a set of tone-on and tone-off) that the PBX receives is fixed to 4 times in the ranges of: = 100–1300 ms,...
  • Page 703 Note that this option can only be set when SVM Cyclic Tone Detection on this screen is set to "Option". To apply changes to this setting, follow the steps below: Change this setting. Set the status of the SVM card (KX-TDA30) or OPB3 card (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600) to "OUS", then "INS". Value Range 20 × n (n=6–200) ms Maintenance Console Location 2.12.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM...

  • Page 704: 5-4] External Relay

    Settings related to external relays can be programmed. External Relay No. Indicates the number of the external relay (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–4 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–16 KX-TDA600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 2.12.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References...
  • Page 705 2.12 [5] Optional Device Value Range For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.12.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 706 2.12 [5] Optional Device Relay Activate Time Specifies the length of time that the relay stays on when activated. Value Range 1–7 s Maintenance Console Location 2.12.6 [5-4] External Relay Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.10 External Relay Control COS Number Specifies the Class of Service (COS) number.

  • Page 707: 5-5] External Sensor

    To assign destinations for sensor calls easily, click Destination Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting). External Sensor No. Indicates the number of the external sensor (reference only). Value Range For KX-TDA30: 1–4 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–16 KX-TDA600: 1–64 Maintenance Console Location 2.12.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References...
  • Page 708 2.12 [5] Optional Device Value Range For KX-TDA30: Slot number For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600: Slot and sub-slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.12.7 [5-5] External Sensor Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.17.9 External Sensor Physical Location—Port Indicates the port number (reference only).
  • Page 709 1.17.9 External Sensor Tenant No. Specifies the tenant to which the sensor belongs, to determine the Time Table for the sensor. (The tenant number corresponds to the Time Table number.) Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 2.12.7 [5-5] External Sensor...

  • Page 710: 6] Feature

    Selects the System Speed Dialling Table to be programmed. Whether a tenant uses the basic System Speed Dialling Table or the additional table (with MEC [KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200] or EMEC [KX-TDA600] card) depends on the setting of System Speed Dial in 2.13.6 [6-6] Tenant.
  • Page 711 2.13 [6] Feature Value Range Max. 20 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.13.1 [6-1] System Speed Dial Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.6.1.5 Speed Dialling—Personal/System 1.18.1 Caller ID CO Line Access Number + Telephone Number Specifies the telephone number (including the Trunk Access number) or feature number assigned to the System Speed Dialling number.
  • Page 712 2.13 [6] Feature Feature Guide References 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution 1.18.1 Caller ID PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 713: 6-2] Hotel & Charge

    2.13 [6] Feature 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Various settings related to the hospitality features of the PBX can be set. Main Hotel Operator—Extension 1–4 Specifies the numbers of the extensions designated as hotel operators. Value Range Max. 5 digits (consisting of 0–9) Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 714 2.13 [6] Feature Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.28.4 Timed Reminder SMDR for External Hotel Application 2—Printing Message 1–8 Specifies the text of the message output on SMDR when this Printing Message is selected from an extension.
  • Page 715 2.13 [6] Feature Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—LCD for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as shown on the display of the hotel operator extension when entering room charges. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 716 2.13 [6] Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Checkout Billing—Bill (SMDR) for "Telephone" Specifies the name of charge item 1 as printed on the guest bill. Value Range Max. 12 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 717 2.13 [6] Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room SMDR for External Hotel Application—Language for Bill (SMDR) Specifies the language used for standard items shown on guest bills printed out using the Call Billing feature.
  • Page 718 2.13 [6] Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Charge Margin & Tax—Margin Rate for "Telephone" (%) Specifies the percentage margin to be added to telephone charges displayed on the guest bill. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel &...
  • Page 719 2.13 [6] Feature Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.27.3 Call Billing for Guest Room Margin & Tax—Tax Rate for "Others" (%) Specifies the percentage tax rate to be used when calculating guest charges for charge item 3. Value Range 0.00–99.99 % Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 720 2.13 [6] Feature Charge Options—Currency Specifies the currency characters shown on the display of the extension and the SMDR. Value Range Max. 3 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit 2.13.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Budget Management Feature Guide References...
  • Page 721 2.13 [6] Feature Maintenance Console Location 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Programming Manual References 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit Feature Guide References 1.9.2 Budget Management Charge Options—Meter Start on Answer Detection Enables the PBX to start counting the call charge when the answer signal from the telephone company is detected.

  • Page 722: 6-3] Verification Code

    2.13 [6] Feature 2.13.3 [6-3] Verification Code A verification code is used to override the Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) of the extension in use to make a certain trunk call, or to identify the call for accounting and billing purposes. A maximum of 1000 verification codes can be programmed with other related parameters.

  • Page 723: Itemised Billing Code For Ars

    2.13 [6] Feature Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.9.6 Verification Code Entry WARNING There is a risk that fraudulent telephone calls will be made if a third party discovers a personal identification number (PIN) (verification code PIN or extension PIN) of the PBX.

  • Page 724: Budget Management

    2.13 [6] Feature Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Budget Management Specifies the limit of the call charge that will be counted on the verification code. The number of decimal places that can be specified here depends on the value set in Charge Options—Digits After Decimal Point in 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel &...

  • Page 725: 6-4] Second Dial Tone

    2.13 [6] Feature 2.13.4 [6-4] Second Dial Tone A programmed Pause time can be inserted automatically between the Second Dial Tone Waiting code and the following digits. When a programmed Second Dial Tone Waiting code is dialled after seizing a trunk, a preprogrammed number of pauses are inserted after the code. A maximum of 100 Second Dial Tone Waiting codes can be programmed.

  • Page 726: 6-5] Absent Message

    2.13 [6] Feature 2.13.5 [6-5] Absent Message When a display PT user calls an extension, a message is shown on the caller's telephone display describing the reason for absence. A maximum of 8 Absent Messages can be programmed, and any extension user can select one of them.

  • Page 727: 6-6] Tenant

    2.13 [6] Feature 2.13.6 [6-6] Tenant A maximum of 8 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200)/32 (KX-TDA600) tenants can share the PBX. Each tenant is composed of specified extension user groups. The PBX offers each tenant its own Time Table and system resources. To assign extensions as operators easily, click Extension Number Setting (see 2.1.6 Extension Number Setting).

  • Page 728: Ars Mode

    2.2.3 Tenant Service System Speed Dial Specifies which system speed dialling table is used by the tenant. This setting is only available when an MEC (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or EMEC (KX-TDA600) card is installed. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Basic Memory: PBX basic system speed dialling numbers are used.

  • Page 729: 7] Trs

    2.14 [7] TRS 2.14 [7] TRS 2.14.1 [7-1] Denied Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

  • Page 730: 7-2] Exception Code

    2.14 [7] TRS 2.14.2 [7-2] Exception Code Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. Each time mode of every COS is assigned one of the seven TRS/Barring levels. TRS/Barring level 7 provides the maximum restriction (all trunk calls are prohibited) and level 1 provides the minimum (all trunk calls are allowed).

  • Page 731: 7-3] Special Carrier

    If a Special Carrier Access Code is found in the dialled number, TRS/Barring will look only at the following digits. A maximum of 20 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 100 (with the KX-TDA600) Special Carrier Access Codes can be programmed. With the KX-TDA600, 20 codes are displayed at a time.

  • Page 732: 7-4] Emergency Dial

    2.14 [7] TRS 2.14.4 [7-4] Emergency Dial Any extension user can dial the programmed emergency numbers at any time after seizing a trunk. The restrictions imposed on the extension, such as Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring), Account Code—Forced mode, and Extension Dial Lock are disregarded. A maximum of 10 emergency numbers can be programmed.

  • Page 733: 7-5] Miscellaneous

    2.14 [7] TRS 2.14.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) prohibits an extension from making certain trunk calls. The following optional settings can be programmed to activate a TRS/Barring check, override TRS/ Barring, or switch between TRS/Barring methods. TRS Override by System Speed Dialling Enables an outgoing trunk call to override TRS/Barring when the call is made using System Speed Dialling.
  • Page 734 2.14 [7] TRS Maintenance Console Location 2.14.5 [7-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters Feature Guide References 1.9.1 Toll Restriction (TRS)/Call Barring (Barring) Dial Digits Limitation After Answering—Dial Digits Specifies a limit to be placed on the number of digits which can be dialled after an extension user receives a trunk call.
  • Page 735 2.14 [7] TRS TRS Table Mode for Level N (N=2_6) Selects the method of TRS/Barring to be used for restricting calls. The level of TRS/Barring is determined by the telephone codes set in the Denied Code Tables and Exception Code Tables. Value Range Deny Table 2_N + Except Table N_6: The Denied Code Tables for the higher levels are applied to all levels below it, and the Exception Code Tables for the lower levels are applied to all levels above it.

  • Page 736: 8] Ars

    2.15 [8] ARS 2.15 [8] ARS 2.15.1 [8-1] System Setting Automatic Route Selection (ARS) automatically selects the appropriate carrier at the time a trunk call is made, according to the programmed settings. The user-dialled number will be checked and modified in order to connect it to the appropriate carrier. ARS Mode Selects the condition to determine when to operate ARS.

  • Page 737: 8-2] Leading Number

    2.15 [8] ARS 2.15.2 [8-2] Leading Number Specifies the area codes and/or telephone numbers as leading numbers that will be routed by the ARS feature. A maximum of 1000 different leading numbers can be programmed, and each leading number can select a Routing Plan Table number, which determines the ARS procedure. The additional (remaining) number of digits can also be specified for each leading number.
  • Page 738 2.15 [8] ARS Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–16 For KX-TDA600: 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 2.15.2 [8-2] Leading Number Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 739: 8-3] Routing Plan Time

    The start and end times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks are shown for each day of the week. There are 16 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) Routing Plan Tables, and each Routing Plan Table can have its own time blocks. Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list.

  • Page 740: 8-3] Routing Plan Time-Time Setting

    2.15 [8] ARS 2.15.4 [8-3] Routing Plan Time—Time Setting The start times of a maximum of 4 different time blocks can be programmed for each day of the week, for the selected Routing Plan. Each time block automatically ends when the subsequent block begins. Time-A–D—Setting Enables the setting of the start time for each time block.

  • Page 741: 8-4] Routing Plan Priority

    Select the desired Routing Plan Table number from the Routing Plan list. Select the desired day of the week by clicking the applicable tab. Time-A–Time-D Specifies the carrier to be given priority for each time zone. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 1–10 For KX-TDA600: None, 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 2.15.5 [8-4] Routing Plan Priority...

  • Page 742: 8-5] Carrier

    It is possible to specify how user-dialled numbers are modified for connecting to the appropriate carrier. A maximum of 10 (with the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 48 (with the KX-TDA600) different carriers can be programmed to be used with the ARS feature.
  • Page 743 2.15.6 [8-5] Carrier Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.10.1 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600) Selects the trunk groups that connect to the carrier. TRG 01–TRG 64 (KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200), or TRG 01–TRG 96 (KX-TDA600) Enables each trunk group for each carrier.
  • Page 744 Authorisation Code for Tenant—Tenant 1–Tenant 32 Specifies the Authorisation code of each carrier for each tenant. Note For the KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200, only up to 8 tenants are available. Value Range Max. 16 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.15.6 [8-5] Carrier...

  • Page 745: 8-6] Leading Number Exception

    2.15 [8] ARS 2.15.7 [8-6] Leading Number Exception Specifies telephone numbers that will not be connected using the ARS feature. When the user-dialled number includes a leading number exception, the PBX sends the number to a trunk by the Idle Line Access method if ARS Mode in 2.15.1 [8-1] System Setting is "on".

  • Page 746: 8-7] Authorisation Code For Trg

    2.15 [8] ARS 2.15.8 [8-7] Authorisation Code for TRG An Authorisation code can be specified for each trunk group. The Authorisation codes entered here can be added to user-dialled numbers by adding "G" to the Modify Command specified on the Carrier tab of screen 2.15.6 [8-5] Carrier.

  • Page 747: 9] Private Network

    2.16 [9] Private Network 2.16 [9] Private Network 2.16.1 [9-1] TIE Table A TIE line is a privately leased communication line between two or more PBXs, which provides cost effective communications between company members at different locations. A maximum of 32 TIE Line Routing and Modification Tables can be programmed. It is necessary to make unified tables with all PBXs at different locations in a TIE line network in order to identify the trunk route to be used when an extension makes or receives a TIE line call.
  • Page 748 Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Trunk Group Specifies the trunk group to be used for TIE line calls for each priority. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: None, 1–64 For KX-TDA600: None, 1–96 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 749 2.16 [9] Private Network Maintenance Console Location 2.16.1 [9-1] TIE Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Centralised VM Leading Number Specifies the leading number for other PBX extension numbers or the PBX code of other PBXs in the TIE line network.

  • Page 750: 9-2] Network Data Transmission

    Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.16.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN CO—Networking Data Transfer 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Networking Data Transfer PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 751 2.16 [9] Private Network Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Data Transmission ISDN->VoIP Selects whether to re-send BLF data received from an ISDN port through any VoIP ports that are set to transmit BLF data.
  • Page 752 2.16 [9] Private Network Maintenance Console Location 2.16.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) Network MSW Data Transmission for Centralised VM Feature—Data Re- transmission : Repeat Counter Specifies the number of times re-transmission of network message waiting notifications is repeated before being cancelled.

  • Page 753: 9-3] Network Operator (Voip)

    Specifies the slot number (with the KX-TDA600, shelf and slot number) of the card used to send extension status data. This setting is only required when using VoIP to transmit data. Value Range For KX-TDA30: Undefined, 5–7 For KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: Undefined, 1–11 For KX-TDA600: Undefined, 1-1–4-11 Maintenance Console Location 2.16.3 [9-3] Network Operator (VoIP)
  • Page 754 2.16 [9] Private Network Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 755: 9-4] Ndss Key Table

    2.16 [9] Private Network 2.16.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Extensions at up to 7 other PBXs that will be monitored using Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) can be registered. A maximum of 250 extensions can be registered. To create an NDSS button to monitor an extension, the extension must be registered here first.
  • Page 756 2.16 [9] Private Network Value Range None, 1–8 Maintenance Console Location 2.16.4 [9-4] NDSS Key Table Programming Manual References 2.16.2 [9-2] Network Data Transmission—Network Data Transmission for Centralised Operator Feature—Network PBX ID Feature Guide References 1.30.5.1 Network Direct Station Selection (NDSS) PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 757: 10] Co & Incoming Call

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Trunks can be assigned a name, and grouped into a maximum of 64 (with the KX-TDA30/KX- TDA100/KX-TDA200) or 96 (with the KX-TDA600) trunk groups. For KX-TDA600, all supported cards are displayed in the Select Shelf &...

  • Page 758: Trunk Group Number

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Maintenance Console Location 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the type of card to which the CO line is connected (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings...
  • Page 759 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Value Range KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–64 KX-TDA600: 1–96 Maintenance Console Location 2.17.1 [10-1] CO Line Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.2 Group PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 760: 10-2] Dil Table & Port Settings

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Direct In Line (DIL) or Direct Dialling In (DDI)/Direct Inward Dialling (DID) can be selected for each trunk as the method of distributing incoming trunk calls to certain destinations. For each trunk to which DIL distribution is set, different destinations can be programmed depending on the time mode (day/lunch/break/night).
  • Page 761 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only). Value Range Card type Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 762 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 763 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 2.2.3 Tenant Service 2.2.4 Time Service VM Trunk Group No. Specifies the number of the VM trunk group sent to the VPS when the DIL destination is the floating extension number of a VM (DPT) Group.
  • Page 764 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Slot Indicates the slot position of each trunk card (reference only). Value Range Slot number Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None...
  • Page 765 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY Trunk Property Indicates the networking type of each trunk (reference only). Value Range Public, Private(TIE), VPN Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 766 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.2 Direct In Line (DIL) 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution DDI / DID / TIE / MSN For each trunk to which DDI/DID distribution is set, or for each trunk whose Trunk Property on this screen is Private (TIE), modification parameters for DDI/DID number and TIE line call numbers can be programmed.
  • Page 767 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Feature Guide References None Port Indicates the port number (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None Card Type Indicates the trunk card type (reference only).
  • Page 768 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Feature Guide References 1.1.1.1 Incoming Trunk Call Features—SUMMARY 1.30.1 TIE Line Service 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Distribution Method Selects the distribution method for incoming trunk calls. The value range of this setting depends on the card type and Trunk Property assigned for each trunk.
  • Page 769 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call DDI/DID/TIE/MSN—Additional Dial Specifies the number to be added to the incoming called number in the place of the removed digits for DDI/DID distribution or for TIE line service. Value Range Max. 8 digits (consisting of 0–9, *, and #) Maintenance Console Location 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table &...

  • Page 770: 10-3] Ddi / Did Table

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Incoming trunk calls with DDI/DID numbers can be distributed to specific destinations. Each DDI/DID number has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). When CLI distribution is enabled for a DDI/DID number, incoming trunk calls with that DDI/DID number will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the DDI/DID destinations) if the caller's identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table, which is used as the Caller ID Table.
  • Page 771 1.30.1 TIE Line Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 2.17.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References 2.9.5 [2-4] Week Table...
  • Page 772 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Value Range 1–48 Maintenance Console Location 2.17.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) 1.24.3 Voice Mail DPT (Digital) Integration CLI Ring for DDI/DID—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

  • Page 773: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Automatic Registration

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.4 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Automatic Registration Automatic Registration allows DDI/DID numbers and DDI/DID destinations in each time mode (day/ lunch/break/night) to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
  • Page 774 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Programming Manual References 2.17.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Destination—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Specifies the number of the DDI/DID destination in each time mode for the first location to be programmed.

  • Page 775: 10-3] Ddi/Did Table-Name Generate

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.5 [10-3] DDI/DID Table—Name Generate Name Generate allows DDI/DID names to be programmed at once for a set of locations in series. If a name generated here is longer than 20 characters, the additional characters will be discarded. Beginning Entry Location Specifies the number of the first location to be programmed.
  • Page 776 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Programming Manual References 2.17.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table Feature Guide References 1.1.1.3 Direct Inward Dialling (DID)/Direct Dialling In (DDI) Name Prefix Specifies the text to be included at the start of each DDI/DID name. Value Range Max.

  • Page 777: 10-4] Msn Table

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.6 [10-4] MSN Table Incoming ISDN-BRI (Basic Rate Interface) line calls with Multiple Subscriber Numbers (MSNs) can be distributed to a certain destination. Each MSN has a destination programmed for each time mode (day/lunch/break/night). A maximum of 10 MSNs can be programmed for each ISDN-BRI port.
  • Page 778 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.17.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None MSN Number Specifies the MSN.
  • Page 779 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Tenant Number Specifies the tenant number, to determine the Time Table by which calls are distributed depending on the time of day. Value Range For KX-TDA30/KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200: 1–8 For KX-TDA600: 1–32 Maintenance Console Location 2.17.6 [10-4] MSN Table...
  • Page 780 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Maintenance Console Location 2.17.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port Feature Guide References 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service CLI for MSN When CLI distribution is enabled for an ISDN-BRI line to which MSN distribution is set, incoming trunk calls will be distributed to the CLI destinations (instead of the MSN destinations) if the caller's identification number is found in the System Speed Dialling Table.
  • Page 781 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Port Indicates the port number of the BRI card that is set to MSN distribution (reference only). Value Range Port number Maintenance Console Location 2.17.6 [10-4] MSN Table Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References None CLI Ring for MSN—Day, Lunch, Break, Night Enables CLI distribution in each time mode.

  • Page 782: 10-5] Miscellaneous

    2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call 2.17.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous The Intercept Routing feature can activate when the destination of an incoming call is unavailable, or when there is no destination for the call, to reroute the call to an alternate destination. Intercept—Intercept Routing - DND (Destination sets DND) Enables the Intercept Routing—DND feature to activate when the original destination is in DND mode.
  • Page 783 2.17 [10] CO & Incoming Call Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.17.7 [10-5] Miscellaneous Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.1.1.7 Intercept Routing—No Destination PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 784: 11] Maintenance

    2.18 [11] Maintenance 2.18 [11] Maintenance 2.18.1 [11-1] Main SMDR Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) automatically records detailed information about incoming and outgoing calls. SMDR Format—Type Selects the format of SMDR output. Value Range Type A: 80 digits without call charge information Type B: 80 digits with call charge information Type C: 120 digits Maintenance Console Location...
  • Page 785 2.18 [11] Maintenance Value Range 4–99 Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Format—Blank Footer Length (Number of Lines) Specifies the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page. The number of lines for the skip perforation should be shorter than the page length.
  • Page 786 2.18 [11] Maintenance Value Range 12H, 24H Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Outgoing Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing trunk calls are printed. Class of Service (COS) programming determines the printable records.
  • Page 787 2.18 [11] Maintenance Print Information—Intercom Call Specifies whether the dialled digits of outgoing intercom calls are printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Print Information—Log-in / Log-out Specifies whether the log-in/log-out status is printed.
  • Page 788 2.18 [11] Maintenance 1.27.2 Room Status Control Print Information—Timed Reminder (Wake-up Call) Selects whether Timed Reminder data is output on SMDR. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) 1.28.4 Timed Reminder...
  • Page 789 2.18 [11] Maintenance Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.5.4.8 Host PBX Access Code (Access Code to the Telephone Company from a Host PBX) 1.10 Automatic Route Selection (ARS) Features 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Options—Caller ID Number &...
  • Page 790 2.18 [11] Maintenance Note that selecting Dial before ARS Modification in SMDR Options—ARS Dial on this screen indicates the dialled numbers as dots regardless of this setting. Value Range Print ".." (Secret), Print Dialled Number Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 791 2.18 [11] Maintenance Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) SMDR Options—Condition Code "AN" Specifies whether the time of answering an incoming trunk call is printed. Value Range No Print, Print Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None...
  • Page 792 2.18 [11] Maintenance Value Range 2400 bps, 4800 bps, 9600 bps, 19200 bps, 38400 bps, 57600 bps, 115200 bps Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 2.18.1 [11-1] Main—RS-232C—Communication—Flow Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) Communication—NL Code Specifies the NL (New Line) code for the printer or personal computer.
  • Page 793 2.18 [11] Maintenance Communication—Word Length Specifies the number of bits in each byte of a character. When connecting the Maintenance Console to the PBX using an RS-232C cable, assign the following values to the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX: Word Length: 8 bit, Parity Bit: None, Stop Bit: 1 bit CAUTION Do not use the following combinations:...
  • Page 794 2.18 [11] Maintenance Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 1.26.1 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) External Modem Command—Automatic Initialisation Specifies the command to automatically initialise an external modem when it is plugged into the Serial Interface (RS-232C) port of the PBX.
  • Page 795 2.18 [11] Maintenance Maintenance Local Alarm Display—Extension 1, Extension 2 Specifies the extension numbers of PTs that will be notified by the PBX about local alarms. When the PBX detects a PBX error, the System Alarm button on the PT turns on red. When this button is pressed, the display will show the error number, and the button light will turn off automatically.
  • Page 796 2.18 [11] Maintenance Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Daily Test Start Time—Minute Specifies the minute of the PBX daily self check start time. Value Range 0–59 Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.3 Local Alarm Information Error Log for Centralised VM—Network MSW Transmission (Counter) Enables error information to be logged in the PBX if network message waiting information is deleted...
  • Page 797 2.18 [11] Maintenance Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References 2.16.1 [9-1] TIE Table—Enhanced QSIG Call Information (Optional SD Card Required) Feature Guide References 1.30.5.2 Centralised Voice Mail Remote Remote—Analogue Remote (Modem) Floating Extension Number Specifies the floating extension number for analogue remote maintenance. To enable this setting, an RMT card must be installed, and Remote—Remote Programming on this screen must be enabled.
  • Page 798 2.18 [11] Maintenance Value Range Disable, Enable Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming Remote—Password Lock Counter for Remote Programming Specifies the number of successive incorrect password entries allowed before remote access is locked.
  • Page 799 2.18 [11] Maintenance Password Passwords authorise the user to programme the extension and the PBX by a PT or a personal computer. System Password - PT Programming—Prog ** : User Level Specifies the user level system password to authorise the PT user to access only the permitted system programming.
  • Page 800 2.18 [11] Maintenance Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.2.6 Manager Features System Password - PC Programming—User Level Specifies the system password used to access the Maintenance Console at User Level. Value Range 4–10 characters Maintenance Console Location 2.18.1 [11-1] Main Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References...
  • Page 801 2.18 [11] Maintenance Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.3.1 PC Programming PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 802: 11-2] Pt Programming Access

    2.18 [11] Maintenance 2.18.2 [11-2] PT Programming Access The programming items accessible at User and Administrator level can be specified. 100 programming item numbers are displayed at a time. To display other sets of numbers, click the applicable tab. Program Number Indicates the programming item number (reference only).

  • Page 803: 11-3] Power Failure Transfer (Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200/Kx-Tda600 Only)

    Trunk Card Slot No. Specifies the position of the trunk card to be used. Value Range None, 1–11 Maintenance Console Location 2.18.3 [11-3] Power Failure Transfer (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Programming Manual References None Feature Guide References 2.4.1 Power Failure Transfer Extension Card Slot No.
  • Page 804 2.18 [11] Maintenance PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 805: Appendix

    Section 3 Appendix PC Programming Manual...

  • Page 806: Revision History

    Option 9—PDN Delayed Ringing (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings – Intercept Destination—Intercept Destination—When Called Party is Busy –...
  • Page 807 3.1 Revision History – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.12.3 [5-3-1] Voice Message—DISA System—Option 1 – DISA Intercept—Intercept when all DISA ports are busy – DISA Intercept—Intercept when No Dial after DISA answers •...

  • Page 808: Kx-Tda600 Plmpr Software File Version 5.0Xxx

    • 2.5 Tool • 2.6 Utility • 2.8.1 [1-1] Slot • 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings • 2.11.9 [4-1-7] Wired Extension—Simplified Voice Message •...

  • Page 809: Kx-Tda100/Kx-Tda200 Pmpr Software File Version 3.2Xxx

    New Contents • 2.6.1 Utility—Diagnosis—Network Loopback Test (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—CO Setting—Loopback Test started by Network • 2.9.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial—Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work •...

  • Page 810: Kx-Tda30 Psmpr Software File Version 4.0Xxx

    3.1 Revision History 3.1.4 KX-TDA30 PSMPR Software File Version 4.0xxx New Contents • 2.2.5 Start Menu—Connect—LAN • 2.6.13 Utility—IP Extension Statistical Information • 2.8.36 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension • 2.8.37 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - IP Extension—Common Settings • 2.8.38 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-Extension Port •...
  • Page 811 3.1 Revision History • 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button • 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button • 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console • 2.12.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM—SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone On Maximum Time • 2.12.5 [5-3-3] Voice Message—SVM—SVM Cyclic Tone Option—Tone Off Maximum Time •...

  • Page 812: Feature Programming References

    2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.3 Advice of Charge (AOC)
  • Page 813 2.3.5 Automatic Setup Background Music (BGM) • 2.9.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only) • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features –...
  • Page 814 3.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide Reference 1.16.1 Broadcasting Budget Management • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit • 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 3—Charge Limit • 2.13.3 [6-3] Verification Code—Budget Management • 2.13.2 [6-2] Hotel & Charge—Charge—Charge Options—Action at Charge Limit Feature Guide Reference 1.9.2 Budget Management Built-in Simplified Voice Message (SVM)
  • Page 815 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •...
  • Page 816 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.30.4.3 Call Forwarding (CF)—by QSIG...
  • Page 817 3.2 Feature Programming References Call Park • 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters – Recall—Call Park Recall – Recall—Disconnect after Recall • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Call Park / Call Park Retrieve • 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for Call Park) –...
  • Page 818 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.7 Call Transfer (CT)—by ISDN...
  • Page 819 Feature Guide Reference 1.1.1.5 Calling Line Identification (CLI) Distribution Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection • 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—CPC Signal Detection Time—Outgoing, Incoming • 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 820 – Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – CO Setting—Subscriber Number – Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •...
  • Page 821 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY •...
  • Page 822 3.2 Feature Programming References – CCBS Option • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service – COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY – CCBS Type – CCBS delete digits Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.10 Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber (CCBS)
  • Page 823 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port – Dialling Mode – DTMF Width – Pulse Speed • 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – CO Dial Mode – DTMF Width – CO Pulse Speed • 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port –...
  • Page 824 3.2 Feature Programming References – Dialling Mode – DTMF Width – CO Pulse Speed • 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port – Dialling Mode – DTMF Width – CO Pulse Speed Feature Guide Reference 1.5.4.4 Dial Type Selection Direct In Line (DIL) •...
  • Page 825 2.11.3 [4-1-2] Wired Extension—FWD/DND – Call from CO—DND Status Availability – Call from Extension—DND Status Availability Feature Guide Reference 1.3.1.3 Do Not Disturb (DND) Door Open • 2.8.41 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - OPB3 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Device Type PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 826 3.2 Feature Programming References • 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—DISA / Door / Reminder / U. Conf—Doorphone—Open Duration • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Door Open • 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—CO & SMDR—Door Unlock Feature Guide Reference 1.17.2 Door Open Doorphone Call •...
  • Page 827 2.1.1 Extension Port Configuration External Feature Access (EFA) • 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Flash Time • 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Flash Time • 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Flash Time • 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—...
  • Page 828 1.17.9 External Sensor Flash/Recall/Terminate • 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Disconnect Time • 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Disconnect Time • 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Disconnect Time • 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)—...
  • Page 829 3.2 Feature Programming References • 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button—Type • 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console—Type Feature Guide Reference 1.11.6 Flash/Recall/Terminate Flexible Buttons • 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Miscellaneous—PT Display—PT Last Display Duration in Idle Mode • 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button •...
  • Page 830 3.2 Feature Programming References – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from CO – FWD/DND Set / Cancel: Call from Extension – Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO & Extension – Group FWD Set / Cancel: Call from CO –...
  • Page 831 3.2 Feature Programming References – Options—Longest Idle Distribution (Optional SD Card Required) • 2.10.14 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Member List—Delayed Ring • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up Timer • 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 8—Wrap-up Timer Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.2 Group Call Distribution Hands-free Answerback •...
  • Page 832 3.2 Feature Programming References Hot Line • 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone—Dial—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Start • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Hot Line (Pickup Dial) Program Set / Cancel • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2 –...
  • Page 833 • 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port • 2.8.15 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection Command • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.8.17 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) •...
  • Page 834 1.31.1 IP Proprietary Telephone (IP-PT) ISDN Extension • 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—ISDN Extension • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Extension Setting Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.11 ISDN Extension ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol •...
  • Page 835 – Dial (for ISDN Service) Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.12 ISDN Service Access by Keypad Protocol KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—KX-T7710 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.3 KX-T7710 One-touch Dialling Last Number Redial • 2.9.4 [2-3] Timers & Counters—Dial / IRNA / Recall / Tone –...
  • Page 836 3.2 Feature Programming References • 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 4—Incoming Preferred Line Feature Guide Reference 1.4.1.2 Line Preference—Incoming Line Preference—Outgoing • 2.9.12 [2-7-2] Class of Service—External Call Block • 2.10.2 [3-1-2] Trunk Group—Local Access Priority • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 4—Outgoing Preferred Line •...
  • Page 837 2.18.1 [11-1] Main—Password—Manager Password - PT Programming—Prog *1 Feature Guide Reference 2.2.6 Manager Features Message Waiting • 2.8.4 [1-1] Slot—Card Property - Extension Type—SLT Power Supply (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Message Waiting Set / Cancel / Call Back •...
  • Page 838 1.1.1.4 Multiple Subscriber Number (MSN) Ringing Service Music on Hold • 2.9.3 [2-2] Operator & BGM – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM2 (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX- TDA600 only) – BGM and Music on Hold—Music Source of BGM (KX-TDA30 only) –...
  • Page 839 3.2 Feature Programming References 1.30.6 Network ICD Group Off-hook Call Announcement (OHCA) • 2.9.10 [2-6-3] Numbering Plan—B/NA DND Call Feature – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override – BSS / OHCA / Whisper OHCA / DND Override-2 •...
  • Page 840 Option 1—PT Fwd / DND—Paging to DND Extension – Option 3—Confirmation Tone—Tone 2 : Paged / Automatic Answer • 2.9.19 [2-11-1] Audio Gain—Paging/MOH – Paging—EPG 1 (External Pager 1) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Paging—EPG 2 (External Pager 2) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Paging—EPG (External Pager) (KX-TDA30 only) –...
  • Page 841 2.9.17 [2-9] System Options—Option 4—System Wireless—SDN Delayed Ringing with LCD (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.11.5 [4-1-4] Wired Extension—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 842 • 2.11.13 [4-2-3] Portable Station—Flexible Button – Type – Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console – Type – Parameter Selection (for SDN) (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) –...
  • Page 843 3.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide Reference 1.25.3 PS Directory PS Ring Group • 2.10.13 [3-5-1] Incoming Call Distribution Group—Group Settings—Main—Distribution Method • 2.10.25 [3-9] PS Ring Group • 2.10.26 [3-9] PS Ring Group—Member List Feature Guide Reference 1.25.2 PS Ring Group PS Roaming by Network ICD Group •...
  • Page 844 3.2 Feature Programming References – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) • 2.11.17 [4-3] DSS Console – Type – Ext. No. / Floating Ext. No. (for Hurry-up) Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.4 Queuing Feature Quick Dialling • 2.9.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial Feature Guide Reference 1.6.1.6 Quick Dialling Reverse Circuit...
  • Page 845 Supervisor Extension Number Feature Guide Reference 1.2.2.8 Supervisory Feature T1 Line Service • 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) • 2.8.20 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port—Connection Command (KX-TDA100/KX- TDA200/KX-TDA600 only) Feature Guide Reference PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 846 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Supplementary Service—COLP, CLIR, COLR, CNIP, CONP, CNIR, CONR, CF (Rerouting), CT, CCBS, AOC-D, AOC-E, 3PTY Feature Guide Reference 1.21.1.8 Three-party Conference (3PTY)—by ISDN...
  • Page 847 3.2 Feature Programming References – TIE Line Access • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Other PBX Extension • 2.9.9 [2-6-2] Numbering Plan—Quick Dial—Use quick dial for rerouting to public CO when TIE line does not work • 2.9.11 [2-7-1] Class of Service—COS Settings—TRS—TRS Level—Day, Lunch, Break, Night •...
  • Page 848 • 2.8.11 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - LCO Port—Connection • 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Connection • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection • 2.8.19 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - T1 Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection PC Programming Manual...
  • Page 849 3.2 Feature Programming References • 2.8.25 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - E1 Port—Connection • 2.8.28 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - EM Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Connection • 2.8.31 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - DID Port—Connection • 2.8.34 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - IP-GW Port—Connection •...
  • Page 850 1.2.2.5 VIP Call Virtual Private Network (VPN) • 2.8.14 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - BRI Port—Network Numbering Plan—Trunk Property • 2.8.16 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - PRI Port (KX-TDA100/KX-TDA200/KX-TDA600 only)— Network Numbering Plan—Trunk Property • 2.15.2 [8-2] Leading Number—Leading Number • 2.16.1 [9-1] TIE Table –...
  • Page 851 3.2 Feature Programming References Feature Guide Reference 1.30.3 Virtual Private Network (VPN) Virtual PS • 2.8.47 [1-2] Portable Station—Registration Feature Guide Reference 1.25.6 Virtual PS Voice Mail (VM) Group • 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—DPT Type—Type • 2.8.5 [1-1] Slot—Port Property - Extension Port—DPT Type—VM Unit No. •...
  • Page 852 3.2 Feature Programming References • 2.12.1 [5-1] Doorphone—VM Trunk Group Number • 2.17.2 [10-2] DIL Table & Port Settings—DIL – Tenant Number – VM Trunk Group No. • 2.17.3 [10-3] DDI / DID Table – Tenant Number – VM Trunk Group No. •...
  • Page 853 3.2 Feature Programming References • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN • 2.11.10 [4-2-1] Portable Station—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN Feature Guide Reference 1.9.5 Walking COS Walking Extension • 2.9.8 [2-6-1] Numbering Plan—Main—Features—Walking Extension • 2.11.1 [4-1-1] Wired Extension—Extension Settings—Option 2—Extension PIN •...
  • Page 854 Copyright: This material is copyrighted by Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd., and may be reproduced for internal use only. All other reproduction, in whole or in part, is prohibited without the written consent of Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. 2005 Panasonic Communications Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.

This manual is also suitable for:

Kx-tda30Kx-tda200Kx-tda600

Table of Contents